User Manual

Air Interface Measurement Tool

Version 6.00

© 2011 by Anite Finland Ltd. All rights reserved. This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is intended for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Anite Finland Ltd assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this user manual. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Anite Finland Ltd. Windows®, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Outlook®, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of the Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. MapInfo® and MapX® are registered trademarks of MapInfo® Corporation. CDMA 2000® is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA -USA). The license management portion of this Licensed Technology is based on SentinelLM* © 1989-2003 Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Revision 6.00.01, Last edited July 2011

CO NTE NTS

3

CONTENTS
QUICK GUIDE
SETTING UP THE SYSTEM DATA MEASUREMENTS USING NEMO OUTDOOR Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options


9  10  11  12 

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
COPY PROTECTION Technical Support Expiration IMPORTANT End-User License Agreement Traffic Safety Operating Environment

13 
13  16  17  18  19  19 

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 20 
VOICE TESTING CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE NEMO INVEX INDOOR MEASUREMENTS 20  21  22  23  24  25  26 

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM27 
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Connecting a GPS Receiver Connecting a Scanner Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Connecting Voice Quality Devices NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING 27  28  29  29  29  30  31  32  33  38 

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

39 

CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR 39  Configuration through Welcome page 39  Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog 42  Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually 44  Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES 47 

46 

4

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

CONFIGURATION MANAGER Handler Information User Interface Notifications Scripts Base Station Files Device Configurations Devices View Groups

48  49  50  58  62  63  64  65  70 

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES 71  Measurement Properties – General 71  Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings 73  Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles 77  Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners 86  Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning 98  Measurement Properties - Script 101 

74  79 

DURING MEASUREMENTS
MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner With a Mobile MAKING VOICE CALLS Voice Call Properties Voice Call Properties – TETRA VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS MAKING VIDEO CALLS DATA TRANSFERS Configuring the Data Connection Configuring the FTP Protocol Configuring the SFTP Protocol Configuring the HTTP Protocol Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol Configuring the POP3 Protocol Configuring the SMTP Protocol Configuring the WAP Protocol Configuring the Streaming Protocol Configuring the Trace Route Protocol Making Data Transfers STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING VOIP CALLS SMS TESTING SMS Testing with CDMA terminals MMS TESTING Packet Session Settings for MMS MMS Editor

102 
103  103  103  103  104  106  107  109  112  112  117  120  122  124  125  127  130  132  133  135  135  136  138  139  139  140  141 

CO NTE NTS

5

Making MMS Measurements MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 START EXTERNAL APPLICATION ICMP PING IP PACKET CAPTURING MAKING SCRIPT FILES Script Transfer Stop Commands Add Menu Wait Settings Advanced Running Scripts MEASUREMENT LISTS FORCING FUNCTIONS Channel Locking Band Locking Handover Control Cell Barring CELL TESTING

142  142  145  148  149  151  156  158  161  162  164  168  169  171  171  173  174  179  180 

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION 181  Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile 182  Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile 184  PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS 185  UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone 186  UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements 188  CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones 188  CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners 189  GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS BAND SCAN TIMESLOT TESTING VIEWING GRAPHS Graph Popup Menu Zoom - Scatter Graph Graph Side Panel - Layers Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter Graph Layer Color Configuration 189  192  194  196  197  200  202  210  212  219 

VIEWING GRIDS 218  Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message Grid Popup Menu 219  VIEWING MAPS Map Side Panel Route Plans Map Popup Menu Color Set Editor Map Example 1 Map Example 2 246  248  250  255  273  275  276 

6

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Map Example 3 Map Example 4 Map Example 5 VIEWING FLOORPLANS Multiple Routes and Floorplans Indoor Route Planning Indoor Map Popup Menu

277  278  279  281  282  283  285 

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT REPORT

293 
294 

MEASUREMENT RESULTS
ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Selecting Playback Files During Playback Viewing and Moving Markers Closing Playback Files

296 
296  296  296  297  298  299 

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER299 

USER INTERFACE
VIEW GROUPS MENU BAR TOOLBAR STATUS BAR NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Measurement Menu Playback Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS Custom Windows Parameter Tree Search Functionality Devices View Device Status View Output Window Script Status Window Controlling Windows

302 
302  303  303  303  304  304  305  305  306  308  308  310  310  311  315  315  316  317  319  321  321  321  322 

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW

TROUBLESHOOTING
LOW THROUGHPUT All Windows Versions

324 
324  325 

CO NTE NTS

7

Windows XP Windows Vista/Windows7 DEVICE STATUS VIEW CANNOT ADD DEVICES CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION

326  326  328  328  329  329  329 

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS
TOOLBAR BUTTONS DIALOG BUTTONS GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS

330 
330  331  332  333 

SHORTCUT KEYS NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT
INTERNET SUPPORT USER CLUB PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT

336  337  340 
340  340  340 

APPENDIX 1
INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD

342 
342 

APPENDIX 2 APPENDIX 3
MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW
®

343  345 
345  345 

CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET344 

APPENDIX 4 APPENDIX 5
NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Common Components Optional components MMAC3 WITH CASE Lid Carrying case MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION Without Carrying Case With Carrying Case

347  351 
351  352  352  356  357  357  359  360  364  364  366 

CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR347 

8

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

APPENDIX 6
NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components Setting Up the System Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi

372 
372  372  375  379  385 

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE 386 
VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line Mobile-to-Mobile 389  389  390  390 

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ) Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing 390  Disassembling the EVOQ Module 411  Assembling the EVOQ Module 412  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD 412  Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data 412  Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP 413  Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card

420  431 

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 430  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications 431  Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver 433 

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 436  MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements 438  438  444 

APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES 450 
PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings Antivirus Filtering Low Data Throughputs 450  450  450  450 

APPENDIX 10
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

455 
455 

Q UI CK G UI DE

9

QUICK GUIDE
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM
 From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onwards the software is protected with a copy protection module and it is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based copy protection licenses are no longer valid. 1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (p.27). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo Outdoor 5.xx.xx.exe from the Nemo Outdoor CDROM. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup. 2. During the installation, Nemo Outdoor will ask you to insert the copy protection module on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor (p.13). Please insert the copy protection module and wait until Windows has completed installing the device drivers. Press OK to continue the setup. 3. When the installation is finished, restart the computer. 4. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computer’s COM and/or USB ports. If you are using a laptop, you will probably need a PCMCIA card or a USB serial converter to create additional COM ports. Install the PCMCIA card or USB serial converter and the required driver (p.342). Connect the devices to the COM ports with the specified cables and switch the devices on. Especially with GPRS mobiles that have two cables, be sure to use the correct cable. 5. If you are making a data measurement, you need to create a dial-up connection. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.  Choose one of the following steps: Select step 5 if you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. Go to step 6 if you are an older user of Nemo Outdoor and would like to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. Go to step 7 if you would like to set up the system manually. 6. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM port and dial-up information to them. 7. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see p.42).

You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. 9. Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map. In addition. 12. select the correct COM ports and click OK. which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection. In the Map field. you can also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices. browse the default map file (p. username. copy them to the BTS files folder. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually. double-click the Packet Session item to define Packet Session Settings (p. you can go to Measurement | Add New Device. double-click the User Interface item and select the Paths tab. select a device and configure it for measurements. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p. for example. for example. close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. Define the default map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog. Open the Measurement Properties. 11. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode. If you are using a GPS receiver. C:\Nemo Tools\maps. When you want to view a BTS file on a map. and select a saved measurement for playback. 10. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the work offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) (p. Select the Device item and click the Add button . without connecting and starting the measurement devices.  Setting up data measurements: 1. Click Next. and password) are operator-specific.nbf). Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a Dial-Up Connection. DATA MEASUREMENTS   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Select the device type (phone. Click OK.55). Alternatively. open the Measurement Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used. In the Default map field. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. In the Device Properties dialog.114). you will also need a map. If you have base station files (. Use the Windows® Explorer to copy all the required map files to the maps folder. 2. . You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). Measurement settings dialog (p. select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from the list. browse the folder where map files are stored. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements.73). select a premade device configuration and click Start Devices. You can go to File | Open Measurement. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. and browse a file in the BTS File field. C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. For packet-switched data calls.10 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 8. or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode. When you want to activate the devices. that is. double-click the Circuit-Switched Data Call item to define Data Call Properties (p.66).128). For circuit-switched data measurements. scanner.48) to add measurement devices manually.

7. 121).126).). maps. click the button again. 7. double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (p. the device is connected properly and is ready for measurements. SMTP (p.125).296). open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement. You can now start data measurements. 4. Click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. To finish both the recording and the script. Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button. 2. To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). 6. You can use Scripts (p.149). You can playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p. To perform measurements manually. select the appropriate actions. Click the Rename button to change the file name. FTP (p. POP3 (p. You can also open and close windows during the playback (p. 5. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement.133). WAP (p.128). 5. Click the Start Playback button to playback a file. grids. 58). Nemo Outdoor will start the recording automatically. TCP/UDP (Iperf) (p.139).138). HTTP (p. Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to access the Notifications dialog. . Trace Route (p. or Streaming (p.134). such as. Select a data protocol in the Selected Data Protocol field. To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). start voice call or send MMS message. click the Stop button . 6.118).123). USING NEMO OUTDOOR When a green light is blinking in the Device Status window.149). Alternatively you can open a workspace (File | Open Workspace) that contains some predefined views (graphs.135) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. use the Notifications function (p. 1. from the Measurement control menu. ICMP Ping (p. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. 3. 4. To stop running the script. During playback use the Pause button to freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that particular point in time. Then define properties for the selected data protocol by double-clicking the respective item under Supported Data Protocols: Browsing (p. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). First.Q UI CK G UI DE 11 3.131). Click OK. 115). etc. double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button . SFTP (p.

12 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options Outdoor supports the following command-line options. N95. the following command line  Outdoor5 /W test. in which the user is not able to save any changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace.hwc /M SIMPLE will start Nemo Outdoor. and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect. . You can enter the command lines either with Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd. or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target field. These command lines will enable the user to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. Hence.hwc hardware configuration.wor /H N95.    /W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor /H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor /M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode. load the test.wor workspace.

Nemo Outdoor collects measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard disk.  Note that the new dongle introduced in Nemo Outdoor 5. Plug in the copy protection dongle in a USB port on your PC.80 and later versions.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 13 BEFORE YOU BEGIN This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool Software for Windows® XP Professional and Windows® 7 developed by Anite Finland Ltd. Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze for Windows®. 1900 MHz GPRS HSDPA HSUPA HSPA+ LTE TD-SCDMA TETRA iDEN UMTS (FDD mode) WiMAX Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks. 900. 800.1900 MHz CDMA2000 1xEV-DO AMPS DVB-H EGPRS GSM 850. For a complete list of supported devices. only hardware-based copy protection is used. Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital networks. and maintenance purposes.com.Helpdesk@anite. see the Nemo Outdoor product description and data sheet. The supported network standards are: cdmaOne 450. 1800. A new dongle with a valid technical support and maintenance agreement option will be in use with Nemo Outdoor 5. verification. COPY PROTECTION From Nemo Outdoor 5. A USB copy protection dongle will be delivered in the Nemo Outdoor package. . If you have problems starting Nemo Outdoor. and if the following error messages appear. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization. please contact Nemo Technical Support at Nemo. Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers.80 will not be backwards compatible with the older versions of Nemo Outdoor.8 onward.

when the SPS 00868 dongle key is in use.80. or it can alternatively be downloaded from Nemo User Club.” appears when the application is started. it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version. but that the dongle key is missing valid technical support & maintenance agreement information. No Valid Technical Support Agreement If the error message below appears. Note that you must use the latest version of the software which comes with Nemo Outdoor version 5. The old dongle key The new dongle key The dongles are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5. e. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the old dongle key. either the dongle key is not plugged in or the dongle key is an unsupported model.4.14 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual No Valid License Detected If the error message “Error: No valid license detected…. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the dongle key without information about the technical support agreement. The example above is seen.80. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo Outdoor dongle. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version. Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key with the Remote Update Utility. . Before updating Nemo Outdoor application please make sure that new dongle key is available.g. Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key. it means that the dongle key type is correct.

Start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo Tools | Remote Update Utility. Connect your copy protection module 4. Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject “Nemo Outdoor dongle update”:         Company name First name Surname Street address Zip/ Postal Code Country Telephone number Mobile number 6. Send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support at nemo. The Collect Key Status Information tab opens. . Click Collect Information and select a location where the C2V file is saved. select the Update File in the Apply License Update tab and click Apply Update.com.80 and later) 1.helpdesk@anite. 5.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 15  Updating the dongle (Nemo Outdoor version 5. After you have received the V2C file containing the update. 3. 2.

16 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7.80 and later versions include a compulsory technical support and maintenance agreement option.80 with a 1-year technical support maintenance agreement in April 2011. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 5. The technical support expiration date defines the date the agreement ends. the dongle key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application to the latest version. . After the technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed. Nemo Outdoor can be installed and is ready for use. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2012 cannot be used with the dongle key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. The customer is entitled for free updates until April 2012. Technical Support Expiration The new dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor 5. The dongle is now updated. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor application.

Go to Device Manager.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 17 IMPORTANT  Please note that when you are Running Nemo Outdoor on Windows 7. Repeat this for all the Generic USB Hub items. you need to set the power management options of the laptop to High performance to avoid disruptions in the performance of Nemo Outdoor. Also. right-click the Generic USB Hub item and select Properties. Go to Control Panel | Power Options. Open the Power Management tab and check that the Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power option is deselected. expand the Universal Serial Bus controllers item. Before you begin using Nemo Outdoor. . Select the High performance power plan. check the generic USB hub properties. you need to start Nemo Outdoor by right-clicking the icon and selecting Run as administrator.

Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of the mobile. For full details of this agreement. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor system is running. TM6250. MSM6500. Especially note at this time that Anite Finland does not recommend using Toshiba laptop computers with Nemo Outdoor. In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels. When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual. This is due to certain incompatibilities that may cause the USB port not working as desired. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 386. the battery operation time is reduced from normal use. MSM6800. and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been verified by Anite Finland. TM6275US. TM6275. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description or the compatibility list in the user manual for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite Finland. The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000. it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor triggered events in the mobile. With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. Use only the supplied connecting cable. see Appendix 8 on page 450. End-User License Agreement The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that agreement. With Nokia GSM. for connecting the Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computer’s serial port. and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated. TM6200. .18 Nemo O ut door User M a nual The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind wireless technologies. GPRS. Otherwise. TM7200. included with the Nemo Outdoor. After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile into normal use. the mobile can dial a wrong number. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite Finland does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly.

Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 19 Traffic Safety Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. traffic safety comes first. Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. Finland assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation. or sites where blasting operations are in progress. including its warnings. Remember. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations. chemical plants. Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger. . fuel depots. Operating Environment Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual. It may interfere with nearby electronic devices. for the devices used by Nemo Outdoor.

and fast frequency scanners if applicable.20 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW VOICE TESTING The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user provided or. a GPS receiver. provided by Anite Finland with all the software installed) with the Windows® XP Professional or Windows® Vista operating system. . The package also includes the necessary connecting cables. optionally. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available. serial or USB port adapters.

HTTP. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP. the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. If you are using a FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server. in the Receive mode vice versa. SFTP. Trace route testing and RTSP (video streaming). the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. and a dial-up server. the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server. CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support circuit-switched data. which in turn define the desired transfer rate.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 21 CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo Outdoor). . Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. as well as certain parameters. Ping. POP3. the measurement unit can only receive files. During the measurement. IPerf for UDP/TCP. such as coding scheme and number of timeslots. The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes. SMTP. an application server. The dial-up server is used to establish a data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. In the Send mode. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals.

the measurement unit can only receive files. and RTSP (video streaming). HTTP. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. POP3. the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server. SMTP. PS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data. Ping. If you are using an FTP server. During the measurement. the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers. Trace route testing.22 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and an application server. SFTP. IPerf for UDP/TCP. the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots. . In the Send mode. It is a Linuxbased administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP. in the Receive mode vice versa. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. If you are using an HTTP server.

up to five test mobiles. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. Nemo Outdoor Multi-Data makes it easy to carry out. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional tough roll-around carrying case. not only casual data benchmarking test cases that can be used to compare the performance of different technologies or operators. Combined with Nemo Server. CDMA2000. With the professional high-quality lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use. WCDMA. but also long-term network performance measurements. EDGE. The Multi-Data functionality in Nemo Outdoor allows up to five concurrent data measurements to be performed simultaneously while the system is connected to a single laptop. . and WiMAX. The system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows benchmarking measurements to be performed on different system technologies such as GSM. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. and a GPS device. scanners. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 23 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. HSDPA.e. preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. and different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers. Nemo Outdoor Multi supports a total of seven test devices. i. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a car’s +12VDC power output.

24 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. The system is connected to a single laptop. the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls. voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/data cards. In addition. . a scanner and a sound card. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

Nemo Analyze. GSM cochannel/ adjacent channel interference and GSM/ WCDMA missing neighbor detection. Furthermore. The Nemo Outdoor software application that runs on the Nemo Invex 4G chassis for benchmarking is also widely known as a tool for network optimization. such as.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 25 NEMO INVEX Nemo Invex® system combines powerful intuitive software and scalable military grade hardware design to create superior drive-test systems for wireless networks. With other benchmarking tools QoS statistics can be collected but no actual reasons for possible issues. Nemo Invex is flexible and scalable. These enhanced capabilities help to save time and money and provide additional value added information also to benchmarking campaigns. Quick and easy to deploy. including the latest voice and video quality measurement algorithms. Often the network issue is interference and other benchmarking tools are collecting quality parameters but no real time analysis is performed. . low data rates can be seen without a cause identified. WCDMA pilot pollution. capable of evolving as the network evolves providing the lowest effective total cost of ownership available. significant cost savings can be realized by bundling the data collection solution with a post-processing solution as Anite has a comprehensive postprocessing solution. The Nemo solutions allow the user to activate different interference analysis measurements. such as. Nemo Invex provides critical quality-of-service (QoS) measurements and a wide variety of quality-ofexperience (QoE) service testing.

Just click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. Alternatively normal laptop can be used as well.26 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual INDOOR MEASUREMENTS Nemo Outdoor has an indoor measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a Tablet PC. You can use floorplans as maps. . As GPS receivers cannot be used indoors.

1280 x 1024 recommended Internet Explorer 4. one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per scanner One serial port for each voice quality audio module or one USB port per sound card One USB port for an external GPS receiver Display resolution 1024 x 768 with 256 colors. do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your computer.bit) Professional or Windows 7 ® Professional (32-/64-bit). Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. 1 GB recommended One USB port for copy protection module One USB port per mobile Depending on the scanner used.26GHz or higher required 512MB RAM minimum.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. 1GB RAM recommended For multi data measurements with HSPA+ devices Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS                 PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP (32.00GHz or higher required For voice quality measurements with up to four channels with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.0 or higher for viewing the help file If your computer does not have enough serial ports. Use the Nemo Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor. minimum 1GHz.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 27 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices. that is.26GHz or higher required 100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 342 for more information. . preferably 1.7 GHz for single mobile measurements For multi data measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. Pentium III processor.

N97 and N97US mobile with the micro USB cable and a free USB port Motorola V3X. N96.28 Nemo O ut door User M a nual OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. from cigarette lighter plug)..010 data cable and a free USB port Nokia N75 mobile with the DKE-2 or the DKU-2 connectivity cable and a free USB port Nokia N95. or 3500 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Nokia C5. N85. N85US.010 data cable and a free USB port Leadcore LC8310E mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4.370. V9 or V9US mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port . 6120. 6720US. 6121. N96US. Please note that the scanning receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e. C7-00.   External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted GPS receiver: (optional. 6720. N95 US. following types are supported)          Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Garmin V Garmin 18 USB Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output DKU-2 USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:    Nokia 6230i Nokia 6630 Nokia 6680  DKU-2 or CA-53 cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:    Nokia N80 Nokia 6136 Nokia N92  DKE-2 or mini USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:  Nokia 7376       Datang DTM8101 or DTM8120 mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4. C5-03.g.370.

When the Installation program starts. if applicable. TM6250. MSM6500 Compatible. you will need to restart the computer. C270. TM6275. Open the Configuration Manager. if applicable.xx. 3. 4. Z500. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete. 2. 5.  Note that for Windows® XP and Windows® Vista. and LHD-200E mobile with a LG VX6100/VX7000. Start Windows® and insert the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM in your CD drive (e. 3.g. or P920mobile with the PCB157ULE USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z560 or ZX20 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z720. 2. instructions for devices that require a dial-up connection can be found in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Connect the power cable to the GPS receiver (see the GPS receiver manual). C680. Switch on the GPS receiver. if applicable. Select Start | Run in the Windows® Status bar..xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. However. . TM6200. Connect the cable of the GPS antenna unit to the GPS receiver. Connecting a GPS Receiver  To connect the serial GPS receiver: 1. select Device and click the Add button . ZV10. drive D). Z140. installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account with administrative privileges. KQ-U8A cable and a free USB port Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software is protected with a copy protection dongle. follow the instructions on your screen. NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION  To install the Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software: 1. or A707 mobile with the PCB200BBE USB cable and a free USB port Qualcomm CDMA2000 Compatible. C676.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 29         Huawei C7600 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung SGH-Z105. NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. 6. Z107. MSM6800 Compatible. TM6275US or TM7200 mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port LG U800 or KU950 mobile with a mini USB cable and a free USB port LG KX260. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor 5\Nemo Outdoor x. Plug the other end of the cable into the GPS receiver. Plug the GPS data cable into a free serial port on your computer. See page 13 for more information about copy protection. Start Nemo Outdoor.

refer to page 28. Click on GPS. Start Nemo Outdoor. 3. 5. Connecting a Scanner See the Nemo Scanner Guide for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor. the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 342 for more information. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer. . Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers.30 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. 4. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. If an external fast frequency scanner for a computer’s serial port is used. 8. Click on GPS. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. 2. Select the serial port to which your GPS receiver is connected.  To connect the USB GPS receiver: 1. follow these instructions in order to connect the scanner to Nemo Outdoor. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table: Navigator Type Garmin 18 USB Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 6. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. select Device and click the Add button . Click OK. For a list of necessary hardware. Open the Configuration Manager.  If your computer does not have enough serial ports. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table: Navigator Type Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Trimble Placer GPS 450/455 Baud rate 4800 4800 4800 4800 9600 Data bits 8 8 8 8 8 Parity None None None None None Stop bits 1 1 1 1 1 9. Click OK. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected.

The graph below depicts the system when it is purchased without the carrying case. See page 351 for further information on how to set up the system.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 31 Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Below you will see the two different options as of Nemo Outdoor Multi system that. .

Connecting Voice Quality Devices Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide on page 372 for complete installation and configuration instructions. .32 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The graph below displays the system as when purchased with the carrying case.

click the Add button and select Add Measurement Server Name. you can connect the measurement servers (UIC modules in the Nemo Invex chassis) and devices to Nemo Outdoor. click Close.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 33 NEMO INVEX DEVICE SET-UP After the Nemo Invex chassis has been set up and configured. If a measurement server is missing from the list. To connect to a measurement server. Click the Measurement servers button in the Devices view. Nemo Outdoor will try to connect to the server. Start Nemo Outdoor with the Nemo Invex license option. . A list of available measurement servers is displayed. Enter the server name (IP address) and click OK. The State will change to Connected. Repeat this for each measurement server that you want to connect with Nemo Outdoor. select the server and click Connect. Finally. Select Add | Autodetect Measurement Servers to find all measurement servers connected to the system.

34 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Devices view will display all connected measurement servers. The Local item refers to devices connected directly to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.  Please note that one measurement server supports only one data-enabled device at a time. A list of devices connected to each measurement server is displayed. In the Mode column. In other words. define whether the device will be used for voice or voice and data measurements. you must use one of them in Voice mode. . Click the Autodetect button to detect devices connected to the measurement servers. if you have two data-enabled devices connected to the same measurement server.

I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 35 If you are adding a scanner. to group the devices by type (phone or scanner) or . this may take a few minutes. The devices will be added to Nemo Outdoor. Click the Group devices by type/server button by server. Finally click Add Devices. click the scanner name and select the frequency configuration supported by the scanner. Depending on the number of devices.

you can change how the devices are organized. By resizing the view. .36 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Device Status view displays all the connected devices and their status.

.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 37 Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view. It is possible to save the hardware configuration by selecting File | Save Device Configuration As. Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views. This way all the devices can be loaded automatically the next time you start Nemo Outdoor. Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK.

Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable. DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables. If antennas are too close to each other. . cables.  = 16 cm GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz. select a measurement server and click Disconnect. Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. and connectors: there should be no tight curves.  = 17 cm 1900 MHz. When removing antennas after a drive test.  Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance. GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING Check the condition of all antennas. no slashes or cuts. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength. click the Measurement servers button. Check that connectors are properly connected. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows. and two wavelengths from each other.38 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual To disconnect measurement servers.  = 19 cm Check the configuration before starting the measurement.  = 33 cm 1800 MHz.  = 66 cm 900 MHz. it may cause interference.

It appears on the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. you will need to configure the system for your environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-time user. and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. Older users of Nemo Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. The following instructions will help you in this initial configuration. select the Do not show this again option. This functionality automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information. With the Automatic device detection functionality. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo Outdoor. Furthermore. and matches a dialup connection with the assigned modem port for the device. you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-down menu.  Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB cable. and more advanced users may want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually. Configuration through Welcome page 1.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 39 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS After you have installed Nemo Outdoor. 2. For a first-time user the most convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. . you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system.

In addition. You can also open a workspace file from the Welcome dialog. . when you accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again. 3. This is useful. The device may also require additional configurations in its modem settings. 4. The COM ports are created with the dial-up connection. e. start them in offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button.. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions on how to do this.40 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. you may need to create a dial-up connection for the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor.g. or refresh the device configuration by clicking the Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below.

The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the measurement. select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. This includes the dial-up connection and the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 41 5. If you want. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. 6. 7. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Click Load Selected Files. without connecting and starting the measurement devices. When you want to activate the devices. With the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. . If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline. If you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode. that is. you can configure the devices manually and activate them.

1. click Other… in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window. . All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. 2. select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices.42 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog To view the Load Device Configuration dialog. go to step 4. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode.

scanner.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 43 3. select Empty Device Configuration and click Start Devices. device is added to Nemo Outdoor application with an other chipset support e. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device.Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ devices .g. Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device or by clicking the Add or remove devices button in the Devices view. If license do not cover e. MDM7200 (HSUPA) and HSPA+ trace messages are not activated. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6275 US . or GPS receiver from the list and click Next.Compatible with Qualcomm HSUPA devices Qualcomm TM8200 . Nemo Outdoor application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly. 4. without connecting and starting the measurement devices. select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. that is. The following Qualcomm chipsets are supported:        Qualcomm TM6200 Qualcomm TM6250 Qualcomm TM6275 . 6. For example. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM7200 . Choose the appropriate phone. In the Load Device Configuration dialog. An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears. 5. Before trace message activation application is checking is the licence valid for such a device.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6280 .g. All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. When you want to activate the devices. MDM8200 devices (HSPA+ devices). if device supports MDM8200 chipset (HSPA+) these trace messages are automatically activated.

Click the Autodetect Devices button in the toolbar. Click on Measurement Properties in the Phone/Scanner Properties dialog to enter the Measurement Properties dialog. Select Add Devices in Specific Order to select the order of the added devices.44 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual    Qualcomm TM8220 . and click the Add Devices tab at the bottom of the Autodetect Devices dialog. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. 9. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices. . or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection for network measurements. You can go to File | Open Measurement.Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices 7.Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ dual carrier devices Qualcomm MDM9200 . A dialog with a list of previously added devices and their dial-up connection appears. You can now start the measurements. Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually. and select a saved measurement for playback. Alternatively.Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices Qualcomm MDM9600 . close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. select a device and configure it for measurements. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (alt+M) to open the User Interface Properties dialog. Set the appropriate values. you can go to Measurement | Add New Device. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. Select the devices you want to add. 8. In addition.

Click Add Devices to add the devices to Nemo Outdoor.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 45 In the Add Devices dialog you can select a device and move it up or down in the list to define the device order with the arrow buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog. .

. Go to View | User Interface Properties. select the Start recording automatically when devices are started option. 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically when devices are connected and started. In the Nemo Outdoor main view. perform the following configurations. 2.46 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Use Case 1. On the General page.

if possible. when carrying out measurements. measurements will start automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected. Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 47 3. However. and File | Save Device Configuration As. see the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland. Please consult the mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile. 4. To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for PS data testing purposes. Close Nemo Outdoor. the PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. 6. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor. 5.  Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger. On the Measurement page select Yes in the Start scripts automatically field. CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES The Phone Settings of the Nemo Outdoor test mobile can be user defined. Net Monitoring must be switched off with the Nokia mobiles listed below:  Nokia 6230i . Click OK.

. You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager toolbar button . can be configured.48 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CONFIGURATION MANAGER Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager. The default System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor. Select an item from the list and click the Properties button . except System Properties and Handler Information. Double-clicking on the Measurement Properties item leads to the User Interface Properties | Measurement view on page 52. All these items. The Configuration Manager view consists of several items.

All the handlers that you have purchased can be found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor. you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 49 Handler Information Under Handler Information. you must have the corresponding handler installed. . Each device has its own handler.

50

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Interface

Under the User Interface item, you will find several items: User Interface Properties, Custom Windows, Notifications, Scripts, Color Palettes, Color Sets, and Presentation Modes. The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see page 57). Clicking on Color Sets will display the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further information on how to create color sets, see page 273. You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see page 56). Double-click on the User Interface Properties item to open the User Interface Properties dialog.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

51

User Interface Properties – General

Buffer Size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. The size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement. Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically, for example, windows will be opened the next time you start the SW. Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup, and also when changing from offline mode to online mode. Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls after the measurement is ended. Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message when the measurement has been paused. Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing. Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the Script Status window when script files are used in measurements. Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in audio quality measurements also during playback.

52

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected, the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed. With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option selected, a dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording. Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button. When the Show ‘Enable Missing Neighbor Query’ dialog when recording is started option is selected, a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not currently enabled. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the dialog, the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. However, note that you are not able to enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing neighbor detection. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled. With the Show 'Debug log file management' dialog on exit option selected, a debug file wil be generated when Nemo Outdoor is closed. Please note that you need to run Nemo Outdoor as Administrator.

User Interface Properties – Measurement
By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog. Here you can make settings affecting all measurements.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

53

Filename defines the filename format. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds, e.g., 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. For example, "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. %a %A %b %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366) Month as decimal number (01 – 12) Minute as decimal number (00 – 59) Sequence number (1 – ) Sequence number (1 – ) Current locale's A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 – 59) Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53) Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99) Year with century, as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation, depending on registry settings; no characters if time zone is unknown

%Z

With the Start scripts automatically option, you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script file when you click the Start Recording button in the main window.

With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. When the option is set to No, the mobile will stay in the current state when script is stopped. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state when toggling a script on and off. Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop recording after the script is finished.

54

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts, select the Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before repeating the scripts. With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the measurement. During measurements, Nemo Outdoor will use PC time. Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring only after there is a GPS fix. Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped during measurements. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed. Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from the device when the device is started. When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes, Outdoor uses the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call. With the Enable routing table modifications for local devices option users can enable and disable routing table modification. The option is selected by default. Routing table modification should be disabled only with single data testing. If routing table modification is disabled with multi data testing, it can cause problems when several dial-up connections are opened from one host computer to terminals. All data connections to be established travel along one connection between the host computer and the terminal, i.e. all dial-up connections are routed via one terminal, not via different terminals and their interfaces. This distorts the test results.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

55

User Interface Properties – Paths

In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. In the picture above, you can see the default values. To change the default paths, click on the … button and browse for a new location. In the Default Map field, you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. A World.tab map file is provided by Anite Finland in the installation package. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP testing. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. Default Color Set refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. For instructions on making new color sets, see page 273. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field, select C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds.  Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners.

56

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

User Interface Properties – Presentation

In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S

57

User Interface Properties – Colors

In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices, graph lines, and map routes. The first eight colors are reserved for devices. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes. To make new palettes, click the New button, type a name for the new palette, and define all the colors. To change the palette, select a palette from the Color palette list.

58

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Notifications

Notifications are graphical, textual, and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor includes some premade notifications, but you can also add your own notifications. The notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events, parameters, or values in the measurement file. Depending on your configuration, Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a .png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. A textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default. By double-clicking a notification, the Notifications window appears. There you can make changes to, for example, sound files and icons associated with the notification.

If you want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications. Use the Play button to listen to the file. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list. you should create the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female. . The dialog displays all existing notifications.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 59 Notification Configuration To make your own notifications.wav) to the notifications. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. define which one you would like to use (see page 55). The button will display a preview of the selected image. Browse a bitmap file in the field or use the default file. If you want to attach your own sound files (. Alternatively select View | Notification Manager. From the table you can see the notification title and the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. select the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window and double-click any notification to open the Notifications dialog. Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. you should create the files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\ Nemo Shared Files \Images. Browse a sound file in the field or use the default file. In the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog.

Click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view to open the dialog. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification.60 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog. The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you can activate the notification for a specific device. Select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Title defines a name for the notification. Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain events only once. . Then define the Condition and Value for the selected parameter and click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. You can add several criteria for each notification. Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification.

 To make user-configurable notifications: 1. In the Notifications dialog. select the notification that you just created. The Notification Properties button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings (see page 59 for more information). you can select and clear all items in the list. By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons. Click OK to save the settings. 4. In the Notification Criteria dialog. define the notification criteria and click OK. click the Device notification settings button in the Devices view. . 3. 2. The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Define sound and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table. Notifications dialog. Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 61 To activate a notification for a particular device. Open the Notifications dialog (View | Notification Manager) and click Add. This will open the Measurement Properties. Select the notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified.

62 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Scripts  Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. Scripts can be used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. . Creating Script files is described in more detail on page 156. Under the Scripts item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. click the Device script settings button in the Devices view. In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement. Select the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view.

Click the – button to remove the BTS file. . Select a BTS file to view the BTS information in the Configuration Manager view.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 63 Base Station Files Under the Base Station Files item you will find loaded base station files.

. Alternatively.hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the saved file. To rename a device configuration. You can load a . A device configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations. The new . you will find a list of device configuration files (. When everything is ready. To make new device configurations. Device Configurations folder. you can load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration dialog. You can use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor. double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog. add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure them.hwc).hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager.64 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Device Configurations Under Device Configurations.

and scanner) has its own properties dialog.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 65 Devices Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. Each device (mobile. GPS. These dialogs are presented next. . Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon . Double-clicking on the device will open the applicable device properties dialog. and remove a device by selecting the device and clicking on the minus icon .

See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. and makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. Packet switched dial-op connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. select a dial-up connection here. If you are making PS data measurements. Circuit switched dial-up connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. select a dial-up connection here. .66 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Phone Properties The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. Trace port and Modem port selections are device-specific. and the information is also stored in the log file header. Please refer to the Dial-up Networking Setup Guide for more detailed information. If you are making CS data measurements.

After you have configured the device.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2. you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0.27 Frequency range 824– 894/1710– 1880/ 1850–2170 MHz 1140. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone. Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality measurements. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly.5 m. or Smarteq. SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements. SMA male The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. . You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu.26 890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 67 Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. leave these values blank. To exit the dialog. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings. Antenna type 1140. click OK.55/ 0. Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements. You can also enter the Measurement Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu bar.5 m.

SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq.5 m. . making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing.55/ 0. leave these values blank. Antenna type 1140.26 890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see page 70).5 m. SMA male The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd. a name or a usage purpose. for example. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2.27 Frequency range 824– 894/1710– 1880/ 1850–2170 MHz 1140. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. Antenna gain and Cable loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. If you are using the internal antenna of each phone. you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. and the information is also stored in the log file header. or Smarteq. Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected.68 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Scanner Properties In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas.

The available values for Data bits are 5. 6. None. Baud rate refers to the communication speed. making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. GPS Properties In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device. After you have configured the device. Serial port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected. To exit the dialog. 4800. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. and the information is also stored in the log file header. . and 9600. for example. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. and Odd. click OK. 2400. a name or a usage purpose. To exit the dialog. the options for Parity are Even. Parity and Stop bits are other communication-related parameters.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 69 After you have configured the device. The default value for Stop bits is 1. 7. Check your GPS receiver documentation. click OK. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. The available values are 1200. and 8. Data bits. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly.

70 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual View Groups Under the View Groups item are listed all the view groups that are currently loaded. You can define properties for each view by double-clicking the view name. You can add a new view group from the plus icon . . See page 302 for more information on using the view groups. View groups are sets of windows that are open at the same time. the right-hand panel displays the views that are saved in the view group. and remove a view group by selecting the item and clicking on the minus icon . When you select a view group in the Configuration Manager.

Measurement Properties – General Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 71 MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device type (mobile or scanner). Note that you should enter the name yourself. as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. Click the … button to browse for a BTS file (. BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map.nbf). . If you have a GPS receiver connected to the system. you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. on the device model. and on the technologies supported by the device. The network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been monitoring.

the disabled messages will not be recorded in the measurement file. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. Please note that when measuring with a LX GSM/WCDMA scanner in a WCDMA network. you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.  .72 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By clicking the Advanced button. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the device. Here you can enable and disable various measurement options such as layer messages. The selection depends on the measurement device used. If you disable some of the options. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. This will decrease output file size. the internal GPS receiver should be activated. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback.   Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement.

See page 138 for more information on SMS testing. Voice Call opens the Voice Call Properties dialog. opens the SIP server and VoIP call dialogs. Short Messaging Service button opens the SMS Testing dialog. Selected Data Protocol defines which data protocol is used to perform data transfers. DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice call. See page113 for more information. See page 136 for more information. See page 114 for more in formation. The Measurement Settings page of the Measurement Properties dialog is available for mobiles only. See page 139 for more information on MMS testing. Clicking the field of a selected data protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol. See page 104 for more information.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 73 Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings You are able to make measurement type specific configurations by clicking the corresponding field in the dialog. . Enable VoIP Measurements option. See page 109 for more information. when selected. Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings. MMS dialog. Packet Session opens the Packet Session Settings dialog. Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. Clicking the Supported Data Protocols field opens a list of supported data protocols. Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. GSM900 and GSM1800. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. With TopN scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. e. . You can view the missing neighbor information. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. for example.74 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles  Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports frequency scanning.g. for EGSM. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM. in a grid view.

. click the Select Channels button to define the channels to be scanned. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . To add channels to the Selected list. Alternatively. To select all available channels for scanning. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove channels from the Selected list. Select one band from the list or all of them.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 75 If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . click the Add All button.. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.. . click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. click the Remove All button.items from current band. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. To remove all channels. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected.. items from every band. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning.

. click the Top-N Configuration button to select channels.76 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual If you select the Top-N option. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the Top-N field. You can click on the Clear all button to clear the table. The maximum number of Top-N channels is 32. In the Top-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the Top-N channels are recorded.

Click the Top-N Configuration button to enter the Select Channels dialog. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. . You can view the missing neighbor information. for example. The device will only report cells with CPICH RSCP above the set value. in a grid view.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 77 Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles  Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports pilot scanning. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band. The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS.

you have the possibility to select Remove All | . You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected.78 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the Available view. To select all available channels for scanning. channels from all bands will be viewed.. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add..items from current band. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . Alternatively. Click OK to exit the dialog.. click the Add All button.. items from every band. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu. . click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list.

 RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. of the number of samples.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 79 Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners The Frequency scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30 kHz narrow. The contents of the sub-pages are technology-specific. . Frequency Scanning with GSM Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. in dB. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result.

Click on a channel in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. you can access a dialog where you select the channels that will be scanned. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. L3 messages are written in the log file. Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can be decoded from BCCH messages. To select all available channels for scanning. Cell information decoding. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has been purchased with the scanner. Mobile Network Code. By clicking the Select Channels button. First select the Band. When the System information decoding option is selected. .80 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Top-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest pilots in UMTS. click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators. With Top-N scanning it is possible to get Top-N channel results for each band.

Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. click the Remove All button. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. To remove all channels. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the C TRL key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. Click OK to exit the dialog. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80). By clicking the Select Channels button. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. in dB.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 81 To remove channels from the Selected list. . click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. Frequency Scanning with UMTS Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. of the number of samples.

of the number of samples. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. By clicking the Select Channels button. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.82 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frequency Scanning with LTE Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80). . Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. in dB.

of the number of samples.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 83 Frequency Scanning with CDMA/EV-DO Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. By clicking the Select Channels button. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80). in dB. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. .

you can access the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80). Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. of the number of samples.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. in dB. By clicking the Select Frequencies button.84 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frequency Scanning with WiMAX Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. . Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.

 RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. . Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 85 Frequency Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. in dB. of the number of samples. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. By clicking the Select Channels button. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).

the pilots are not reported. If the values are below the threshold. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. . In aggregate method. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA.86 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners The Pilot scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. The contents of the sub-pages are technologyspecific. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Pilot Scanning with UMTS Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific.

S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling code. Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB). the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the log file for both GSM and WCDMA. L3 messages are written in the log file. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. The Channel number field provides a list of channels that can be selected for scanning. . weak pilots may be undetected. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher. When the System information decoding option is selected. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold.   In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. Selective level determines a valid path. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor (average value). When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. You can view the missing neighbor information. Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. for example. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. If enabled.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 87 Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning. Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner. in a grid view. Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. In high speed mode. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result.

Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. Channelization code specifies the channelization code.  Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners only. Search method defines how the search is performed. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel) searches with P-CPICH. . Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7.88 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and consequently speed up the search. If you press the arrow. Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. a drop-down menu will appear from where you can select Top-N Search Configuration. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH.

and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. In aggregate method. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. Please note that this option is not available with PCTEL EX LTE scanners. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. scanner will report results from N best cells. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. . Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. The available options are 1:1. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to notify you of. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. If enabled.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 89 Pilot Scanning with LTE Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. the scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type. 1:4 and 1:8. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). With Autodetect selected. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. 1:2. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged.

When you select LTE channels.e. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below where. Each radio frame of length Tf  307200  Ts  10 ms consists of two half-frames of length 153600 Ts  5 ms each. Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure. primary and secondary signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set.. “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions. GP and UpPTS. Carrier refers to either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type. Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the interference and noise from the same reference signal set. you can also define some channel-specific settings. select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the settings. In the LTE Channel Specific Settings dialog. . Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 30720  Ts  1 ms . “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS.  Note that the available options are device specific. Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel. for each subframe in a radio frame.90 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. i.

. 153600 Ts = 5 ms One slot.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 91 One radio frame . T slot=15360 Ts Subframe #0 One subframe . T f = 307200 T s = 10 ms One half -frame. 30720 Ts DwPTS 30720T s Subframe #2 Subframe #3 Subframe #4 Subframe #5 Subframe #7 Subframe #8 Subframe #9 GP UpPT S D wPTS GP UpPT S Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity): Uplink-downlink configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D Pilot Scanning with EV-DO Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific.

Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. . Wide and Very Wide. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. the pilots are not scanned. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. The sensitivity will not be affected but the scanning speed will be slower as the search window is increased. If the values are below the threshold. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. Overhead message decoding. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. In aggregate method. The available options are 1:1. It is reported in chips. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). when selected. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. 1:2. enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. For Pilot window search mode the options are Standard. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. 1:4 and 1:8. If enabled.92 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Channel style refers to the style of the channel. The Wide and Very Wide options can be used to detect pilots far away from the base stations.

Chip window size defines the length of pilot window in chips from 1 to 64. Bigger correlator size enables the scanner to detect and measure Pilot channels with better dynamic but makes scanning speed slower. This value is used to establish the number of chips to be searched for pilot across (Pilot Window Length) and to define the position of these chips Pilot Window Mode in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. Correlator affects how the scanner works. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. In aggregate method. If the values are below the threshold. when using correlator size 2048 versus 512. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. the pilots are not scanned. the dynamic range for pilot measurement changes from –21db to –17db. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). . Channel style refers to the style of the channel. For example. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 93 Pilot Scanning with CDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific.

Overhead message decoding. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. scanner will report results from N best preambles. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. Pilot Scanning with WiMAX Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.94 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. It is reported in chips. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. If enabled. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. If enabled. In aggregate method. . the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. when selected. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. scanner will report results from N best pilots. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode.

a downlink signal on segment 0 will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1. in dB *100 (e. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. When Reuse Factor 3 is selected. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning..CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 95 CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value. The values range from 0 to 1023+32.g. The allocation of frequency sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e.g. . It is based on the requested reuse factor.285 nanoseconds. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific. and the CINRs are calculated only from the same segment. Each sample corresponds to 89. only the contribution of the desired segment is considered. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement. whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment. 1 and 2). As a broad guideline. -16.34). so that the CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other. Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired balance between the interference and the network coverage. The WiMAX air interface modulating waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0. contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters. Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code.

96 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Pilot Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. If enabled. In aggregate method. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. scanner will report results from N best pilots. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. . The available options are 1:1. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. 1:4 and 1:8. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. 1:2. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific. Frequency defines the frequency scanned.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 97 The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning. . Pilot Scanning with DVB-H Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific.

This will increase the scanner sensitivity. it is recommended that it is not selected when signal volume is higher than -50dBm. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click Add. . Use preamplifier option should be selected if the signal level is less than -50 dB. However.98 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning In the Spectrum scanning page you can define frequencies that will be scanned. hence slightly decreasing background noise.

press the Add to Scanning List button and select Save as Predefined Set. or save them as a predefined set.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 99 Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned. If you manually define the start and stop frequencies. If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth. Just double-click a set from the list and the predefined values will be selected. you can either select to add the frequencies to the scanning list or save them as a predefined set. Sample count determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. define the scanning frequencies at the top of the dialog. Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the start and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. you can either select to add them to the scanning list. Define the center frequency and the bandwidth. . You can define Predefined scanning sets which you can use to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. To create new scanning sets.

.100 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Define a name for the set in the Enter Frequency Set Name dialog and click OK.

.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 101 Measurement Properties . Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. Script groups can be used. A script group can be also saved with a specific name. . e. With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups. To be able to use script groups. There are some premade script files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see page 135). By default the script group is selected as <None>. all script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized. script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group. but Synchronize script repeats option is selected. whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group.Script In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement. browse the script file that you want to use. and typing the name of the new script group in the field. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device. For example. but the user can also create new script groups by selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu. click the Device Settings button Devices window and select Script Properties. with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. in the In the Script File field.g. the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface Properties (see page 52). and their script files are synchronized with one another. When a script group is selected as <None>. The scripts in the same group are synchronized with each other.

The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. and maps. see page 324. the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are given to illustrate their use.102 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual DURING MEASUREMENTS When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement. In the following chapters. . If you have any problems in starting the measurements. you can view the process in a number of graphs. grids.

insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice Call field. MAKING VOICE CALLS  To make voice calls: 1. Measurement settings page (p. Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. button. If you are running a script. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode. just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file. To do frequency scanning.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 103 MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner In order to measure with a scanner. Click OK. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. . 2. select Stop Voice Call from the Device Commands menu . To end a scanning measurement. select Measurement control | Stop Scanning.  Note that after you have activated the script. wait until the script is finished. you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. 3. With a Mobile To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone. In the Measurement Properties. Alternatively. select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning. or Measurement control | Start Continuous Scanning. 73). first make sure that the terminal model supports the scanning feature.

0 or later. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. When Request voice call callback is selected. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. .104 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Voice Call Properties Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements. callback number is recognized automatically. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server. It must be a valid phone number. Measurement Settings dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings.5. the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. Number defines the number to be called.

make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. The default threshold value is 5. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. When a prefix is defined. 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. the received audio files are not stored. CDMA specific settings.   Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1. See page 156 for more information on making scripts. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. If you leave this field empty. If you want to use your own test samples. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix. Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. With the Terratec sound card.wav. date in DDMMYYYY format.000. 16-bit linear coded . and time in HHMMSS format. Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. . Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. The threshold values range from 0-5. which means that all samples are saved.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 105 Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.000 seconds. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.

It must be a valid phone number. Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. and by pressing the PTT button. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button Group: Call from one terminal to a group. and PSTN. all terminals having that group active can listen. by means of the PTT button . group. Click the Voice Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened. direct. semiduplex. also speak Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network. both parties can speak at the same time Semiduplex: Call between two terminals. Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. Number defines the number to be called.106 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Voice Call Properties – TETRA  Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile. There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex.     Duplex: Normal call between two terminals.

These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. . the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure.1 and P. 862. In mobile-to-mobile measurements. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice and video calls as perceived by end-users. and TD-SCDMA. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 386 for complete instructions on setting up and making voice quality measurements. VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements in GSM. one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample in both directions. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendation P.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. WCDMA. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. 1-6 mobiles and audio modules (with EVOQ) or 1-4 mobiles and audio modules (with TerraTec). Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. For a list of supported terminals.862.000 seconds. See page 135 for more information on making scripts.000. and the Nemo multi rack. CDMA2000. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The Nemo Voice Quality system setup consists of Nemo Outdoor. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 107   PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.

These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end. the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end.108 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. . and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.

If you want to use your own test samples. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 109 MAKING VIDEO CALLS Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. These settings are needed for making video calls. callback number is recognized automatically. Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared.wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. When Request voice call callback is selected. Measurement Settings dialog to access the Video Call Properties dialog.0 or later. 16-bit linear coded . . If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server. Number defines the number where the video call will be made. With the Terratec sound card. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings.5. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2. the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.

If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. which means that all samples are saved.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1. mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point. and press the Advanced button.110 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045. The threshold values range from 0-5. Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time.000 seconds. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. If you leave this field empty. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server. CDMA specific settings. and time in HHMMSS format.wav. The default threshold value is 5. See page 135 for more information on making scripts. . Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.000. When a prefix is defined. the received audio files are not stored. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. Service option defines the service option used for the test call.  Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be made prior to making the call. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. In the Advanced Properties dialog.   Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. Go to Measurement Properties | General. date in DDMMYYYY format. you need to select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu.

Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile  Method 6 .Samsung ZV10  Method 5 .LG KU950 .  Note that after you have activated the script. Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Configuration dialog.Samsung Z105  Method 2 . you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Samsung ZX20  Method 4 . 2.Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad)  Method 9 . Samsung P920. Alternatively. Click OK.Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile  Method 7 .  Method 1 .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 111 Select the method based on the list below. or try each Method separately and select the one that works. Samsung Z560. insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field.Samsung G800  To make video calls and video quality calls: 1.Samsung Z140. LG KF700  Method 8 . . In the Measurement Properties. Samsung Z500. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.Samsung Z107  Method 3 .

Configuring the Data Connection  Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is used for the transfer. It is possible that if the device is not included in the list of supported terminals.112 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that video quality parameters are supported only with certain Motorola test terminals. 3. If you are running a script. you can make data transfers. HTTP. you have several data protocol options for making data transfers: you can use the Iperf for TCP/UDP.  DATA TRANSFERS With mobiles supporting CS and PS data. FTP. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode. select Stop Video Call. or streaming. HTTP Browsing.  Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call – capable terminal based on Qualcomm chipset. SMTP. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. you need to enable the packet decoding function (Measurement settings button General Properties. If you are making CS data transfers. the user must remember to select the correct method from Measurement Properties | General | Advanced Properties prior to making the call. A separate . Advanced button) prior to performing data measurements. SFTP. Each data transfer needs to be set up and configured individually. However.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. POP3. If you are making PS data transfers. see chapter Packet Session Settings on page 114. Terminals verified by Anite Finland support video calls. WAP. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. wait until the script is finished. the video call functionality does not work.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. In Nemo Outdoor. . and this file needs to accompany the measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. see chapter Data Call Properties on page 113.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 113 Data Call Properties Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. username. Username refers to the dial-up server username. Open the Data Call Properties dialog by double-clicking the Circuit-Switched Data Call item in the Devices view. and password) are operator-specific. UMTS.42bis compression is used. Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction. Transparent mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Enable automatic link adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link Adaptation (ALA).110 and v. The parameters are the same. Password refers to the dial-up server password. .34) and ISDN (v. and CDMA. The alternatives are Analog (v. The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best channel coding. There are separate views for GSM. Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface.120). Number defines the number to be called of the dial-up server.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Modem type refers to the modem type that the dial-up server is using. The UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters. Compression defines if no compression or v.

.114 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Packet Session Settings Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring. Double-click the Packet Session item in the Devices view to access the Packet Session Settings dialog. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific.

Listen port refers to the port used by the client. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. the same IP address can be used. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. Note that Firewall should be turned off. For TCP and UDP protocols. Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. If a connection is not established within the defined time. connection attempt will fail. . each connection must have its own IP address.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 115 TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)  Note that it is required that Nemo Server be used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service is slightly modified for optimal performance. For TCP and UDP protocols. or both. Open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration dialogs by double-clicking the TCP (IPerf) and UDP (IPerf) items in the Devices view. Host port refers to the port used by Nemo Server.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. the default port is 5001. the default port is 6015. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.

UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted.6 19.8 9.8 180 TCP window size (kB) 4. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.1 s = 730 kbit = 91.4 76. For example.3 Mbit/s * 0.6Mbps UE category 5 & 6 HSDPA 7.2 9. throughput 64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 384kbps (Rel. the window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired. the data connection attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. Since UDP does not guarantee successful data transmission. The range of Transfer timeout values is from 0 to 60 seconds. For example. .25 100 1020 127. 99) HSDPA 1.6 22. it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission round-trip time (RTT).3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput. If the transfer attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection.116 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Transfer timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7. there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully). If it is too small.5 100 360 45 100 730 91.4Mbps UE category 9 ~RTT (ms) 600 600 600 200 100 TCP window size (kbit) 38. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. with HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7.25 kB.8Mbps UE category 3 & 4 HSDPA 3. UDP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver. the packet error rate (PER) increases. Downlink testing (these values are indicative only): Max.5 100 1440 180 TCP buffer size is the amount of data that can be buffered during a connection without a validation from the receiver.8 153. it can decrease the maximum data throughput. if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s. TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission.2Mbps UE category 9 HSDPA 14. If higher data transmission rate is used.6 76.3Mbps UE category 7 & 8 HSDPA 10. It can be between 1 and 8291 kbytes.

6. Click the PDP Context Properties button. click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. and in that case the data transfer would fail. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be avoided. which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server.  To set up data measurements using FTP 1.  Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog.460 bytes. username. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. 5. the transfer finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred. Next. Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds. This is because when the Transfer data size option is used. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. . The FTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. Create a script (optional) (page 151). On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of smaller data throughput. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. Number of threads defines the number of parallel Iperf data transfers. 3. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.500 bytes. the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred. It should be smaller than the maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. the Transfer duration option will be disabled. The server can be any standard FTP server. Normally when a data transfer is initialized. With passive mode. that is. Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes. the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. The size of the individual data packages is defined in the Packet Size field.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 117 UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Configuring the FTP Protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client. and password) are operator-specific. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 118). 2. It is not limited by time. Settings related to the dial-up server (number.

the same IP address can be used. . See instructions on page 135. and in that case the data transfer would fail. After you have completed the setup. each connection must have its own IP address.118 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server. Port refers to the port used by the FTP server. FTP Transfer Properties Open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the FTP item in the Devices view. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. you can start the actual data transfer. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. With passive mode.

The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>. Resume is not supported with multi threaded FTP transfers. In case of a data drop. etc. Paths tab (see page 55).) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Address refers to the address of the proxy.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them. If a connection is not established within the defined time. this is the source file. If you are sending data. Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. SOCKS4. and SOCKS5. Multi-threaded FTP transfer mode is supported in receive direction. For example. If you are receiving data. this is the destination file. Supported types are Tunneling. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.txt.bin. you must define a different remote file for each connection.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 119 Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If you are receiving data. Nemo Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. filename_tester1. transfer will fail. connection attempt will fail. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. All five FTP transfer sessions are started simultaneously. all threads will start from the beginning. this is the output file. If you are sending data. This functionality is available with FTP upload testing.txt. the size of the downloaded file is 10MB.g. filename_tester2. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements.. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP session. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. you must define a different local file for each connection. this is the source file. we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e. The number of threads is set to five.  . If the transfer does not continue within the defined time.

you can start the actual data transfer. and password) are operator-specific.  To set up data measurements using SFTP 1. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. See instructions on page 135. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. 3.   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.120 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Configuring the SFTP Protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. The server can be any standard SFTP server. and in that case the data transfer would fail. . Create a script (optional) (page 151). After you have completed the setup. 5. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Normally when a data transfer is initialized. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. username. The SFTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. 2. Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 121). 7. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. With passive mode. 6. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114).

Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. connection attempt will fail. Address refers to the address of the proxy. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 121 SFTP Transfer Properties Open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the SFTP item in the Devices view. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Supported types are Tunneling. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server. and SOCKS5. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. each connection must have its own IP address. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server. If a connection is not established within the defined time. the same IP address can be used. SOCKS4. .

Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. 2. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. username. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. If you are sending data.txt. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 123). Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>.  To set up data measurements using HTTP 1. Paths tab (see page 55).  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e. this is the source file. etc. 3. If you are sending data. If you are receiving data. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server.  Configuring the HTTP Protocol The HTTP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP protocol. transfer will fail. 6. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. the user selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. filename_tester1. you must define a different remote file for each connection.g.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 5. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP session. filename_tester2. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. this is the destination file. and password) are operator-specific. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow.txt. In the HTTP testing. you must define a different local file for each connection.122 Nemo O ut door User M a nual In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server..  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them.bin. this is the output file. Create a script (optional) (page 151). this is the source file. If you are receiving data. .

In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog. If you are sending HTTP data. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. Each thread transfers the entire file.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 123 7. See instructions on page 135. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. http://www. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. For example. and SOCKS5. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. Supported types are Tunneling. URL defines the destination. you can start the actual data transfer. HTTP Transfer Properties Open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the HTTP item in the Devices view. Address refers to the address of the proxy. you can use the same URL for all of them.yourcompany. . SOCKS4.com/testfile.   Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. you can define the required data transfer settings. Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal.htm. connection attempt will fail. The number of threads can be defined by the user. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. After you have completed the setup.

2. Create a script (optional) (page 151). you must define a different local file for each connection. Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP Browsing protocol. 3. create a script with several HTTP transfers. 7.  To set up data measurements using HTTP 1. After you have completed the setup. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. Define browser transfer -related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog (page 123). In HTTP testing. 5. See instructions on page 135. you can start the actual data transfer.124 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. the user selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. transfer will fail. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. . Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. 6. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Paths tab (see page 55). To make consecutive transfers. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. Configure the data connection for CS data or PS data (page 114).

texts and links are written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information. If Decode content information is selected. The average PPP and RLC data throughputs are also available.  Configuring the POP3 Protocol POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. information about the images.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.yourcompany. For example. The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the whole page is written to the measurement file. URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. username. The cache and cookies information is cleared after every download.g. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active (PAC. PPP and RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing.com/testbrowser.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 125 Browser Transfer Properties Open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the Browsing item in the Devices view. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. e. for benchmarking purposes as EACH CONNECTION MUST HAVE ITS OWN IP ADDRESS.PAD). and password) are operator-specific. http://www. The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze  For MULTI browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used for multiple simultaneous data connections. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Close window after transfer closes the browser window after the data transfer. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. the transfer will fail.  To set up data measurements using POP3 1. . Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow.htm. Settings related to the dial-up server (number.

Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. E-Mail Settings – POP3 Open the E-Mail Settings (POP3) dialog by double-clicking the POP3 item in the Devices view. After you have completed the setup. 3. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 126). In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server. Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server. POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements. 7. 6.126 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. each connection must have its own IP address.   Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. . Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70) 4. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server. the same IP address can be used. you can start the actual data transfer. Create a script (optional) (page 151). 5. See instructions on page 135.

Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. you can start the actual data transfer. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. Supported types are Tunneling. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. See instructions on page 135. SOCKS4. After you have completed the setup. Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 128). 6. username. . connection attempt will fail. 7. The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog. Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. and password) are operator-specific.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Address refers to the address of the proxy. transfer will fail. 2. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. This will save disk space.  To set up data measurements using SMTP 1. Configuring the SMTP Protocol POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. 5. If a connection is not established within the defined time. POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor. 4. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received from the e-mail server. and SOCKS5. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. 3. Create a script (optional) (page 151). Port refers to the port used by the proxy.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 127 Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices.

Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. . Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. If a connection is not established within the defined time. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server. SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements.128 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual E-Mail Settings – SMTP Open the E-Mail Settings (SMTP) dialog by double-clicking the SMTP item in the Devices view. connection attempt will fail. it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections. each connection must have its own IP address. Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. Therefore. the same IP address can be used.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 129 Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. SOCKS4. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. Address refers to the address of the proxy. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use. E-Mail Editor Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test. . Click the Edit button to open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message. transfer will fail. and SOCKS5. Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages. Supported types are Tunneling. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor. See page 129 for more information on the E-Mail Editor.

in web browsing. Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). 4. Create a script (optional) (page 151). for example. After you have completed the setup. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 5. Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message.130 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). and password) are operator-specific. 2. See instructions on page 135. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog (page 131). . you can start the actual data transfer.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.  To set up data measurements using WAP 1. the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured. 3. username. In the WAP testing. 6. Configuring the WAP Protocol The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP protocol. The WAP protocol is used.

Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections. To make consecutive downloads. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. If a connection is not established within the defined time. the same URL can be used. If you encounter problems with the data transfer.com/testfile. Only one file will be downloaded at a time.yourcompany. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements. . deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 131 WAP Transfer Properties Open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog by double-clicking the WAP item in the Devices view. transfer will fail. http://www. each connection must have its own IP address. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. For example. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. connection attempt will fail. create a script with several WAP transfers. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded. Paths tab (see page 55).htm. Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway.

com website. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. in video streaming.  To set up data measurements using streaming: 1. you can start the actual data transfer. The streaming protocol is used. Note that in order to make streaming measurements. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Note that to make video streaming quality measurements.real. 4. 7. See instructions on page 135. Define Streaming properties (page 133). 2. 6. Create a script (optional) (page 151). In the streaming testing. you must define a different local file for each connection. Configuring the Streaming Protocol The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the streaming protocol. IP packet capturing must be enabled. 3.132 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. for example. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. You can download a free player from the www. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). Refer to page 151 for more information.    A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol and this data transfer is measured. you need to have RealPlayer installed on the computer. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). username. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. and password) are operator-specific. 5. . After you have completed the setup.

Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. To make consecutive downloads. In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing. create a script with several streaming sessions. Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements. Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming. it is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding. etc. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. RealPlayer is not installed on the computer. username.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.5 is supported. and password) are operator-specific. RealPlayer version 10. . If a connection is not established within the defined time. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. rtsp://yourcompany. connection attempt will fail. You can download a free player from the www. Configuring the Trace Route Protocol By conducting Trace Route testing functionality.com/testfile. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. transfer will fail. For example. See page 135 for instructions on making scripts. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections.rm. URL defines the IP address of the video file that will be streamed. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections. With ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another.  Note that if the Streaming item is not available in the Devices view.com website.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 133 Streaming Properties Open the Streaming Properties dialog by double-clicking the Streaming item in the Devices view.real. you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the target server.

7. After you have completed the setup. 2. The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement. for example. 5. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. www. See below how to define Trace Route properties. Create a script (optional) (page 151).anite.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals. the same IP address can be used! If you encounter problems with the data transfer. See instructions on page 135. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. 3. HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete.com. . each connection must be given its own. you can start the actual data transfer.134 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  To set up data measurements using the Trace Route Protocol 1. Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. Connect (page 29) and configure (page 66) the measurement devices. 4. separate IP address! Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 113) or PS data (page 114). Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 70). 6. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Trace Route Properties Open the Trace Route Properties dialog by double-clicking the Trace Route item in the Devices view. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.

 Note that after you have activated the script. for example. To make manual CS data calls.  To make data transfers: 1. Wait until the call is connected and dial-up connection established. packet error rate. select Stop Packet Session/ Stop Data Call. jitter. WAP. STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the network. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. You can view.2 player on the computer. and measures video quality type. Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. from a line graph some streaming parameters. Making Data Transfers After you have configured the data connection (CS or PS data) and selected and configured the data protocol (Iperf (TCP/UDP). 5. A video preview can also be seen during the measurement in Nemo Outdoor. To end the data transfer/data call. Open a line graph (Data | Line Graph | New). 4. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device. 3. you will need to install RealPlayer 10 or 11 and Apple QuickTime 7. From the Measurement menu. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button. Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements. The graph will now display the selected parameter. click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Packet Session. the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo Outdoor.2 player are installed on the computer. or streaming). 2. Browsing.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 135 By selecting the Resolve host names item. POP3. To make manual PS data calls. . Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. SMTP. FTP. you can start making the data transfers.  Making streaming video quality measurements: 1. Then select 3. From the Measurement menu. SFTP. and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 133).  Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers. In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements. HTTP. 2. Nemo Outdoor will automatically activate the PDP context and make the GPRS attach. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 133). click the Measurement control button in the Devices view and select Start Data Call. 4. so multi measurements are not possible. Check that RealPlayer and Apple QuickTime 7. and MOS. Nemo Outdoor supports Psytechnics PVI streaming video quality testing. select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed.

login to http://www.g. you will need to install a SIP server. When selected. In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements. The default SIP port is 5060. To find more information on installing the Asterisk SIP server. automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as soon as Packet Session has been created). through which SIP messages are sent. pbx. when selected. Domain defines the address of the SIP server. Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server. Port defines the SIP port.fi.136 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VOIP CALLS With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor.org/applications/pbx To start making VoIP call measurements. Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid. Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy. you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the SIP Server Settings and VoIP call configurations dialogs. Proxy address/port defines the proxy. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option and double-clicking the SIP Server item in the Devices view. . a user is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions. e. Nemo Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server.asterisk. Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the corresponding password.nemo. Automatic registration.

 Making VoIP measurements: 1. To start packet session. to unregister SIP server. click on the Measurement control button | Stop VoIP Call. The order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a counterparty. SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver. a new call can be made without unregistering) . click on the Measurement control button | Unregister SIP Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step. Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds. 4. For example. 5. To start VoIP measurement. 2. To register SIP server. click on the Measurement control button | Register SIP Server. 6. Finally. Select the Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Devices view and define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations. only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an incoming call. 3. click on the Measurement control button | Start Packet Session. To end VoIP measurement. in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is G729/8000.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 137 Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option and double-clicking the VoIP Call item in the Devices view. click on the Measurement control button | Start VoIP Call. In addition. Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them.

for example. Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings. a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages. . Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. Open the SMS Testing dialog by double-clicking the Short Messaging Service item in the Devices view.138 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SMS TESTING SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. +3581234567. Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code. Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. When the End-to-end message option is selected. Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing. Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages are sent. The limit is set to 15000 characters. When the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database.

also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling statistical success rate calculations. 1. SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the terminal. LG KX256. 2. you will need to define some MMS-related settings in the Packet Session Settings dialog. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS. click on the Measurement control button and select Send SMS Message. 4. . Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor. PDP context activation. LG VX8100. 5. Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). 3. Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. Also separate delays from Attach. for example. 1. and message sending/receiving are recorded. The testing goes as follows.. select All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS messages. LG C676. from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. i. LG VX8350. before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . Type in the test message and click OK. the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. LG KX206. Define the Timeout. See the applicable datasheet for further information. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phone’s Saved messages folder. send an SMS to the target phone number from the phone’s keypad. After that Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again. MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts.e. logging to MMSC. Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testingrelated events. 3. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are sending the test SMS message. In the Devices view. and LG LHD-200E. you must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. 2.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 139   Making SMS testing measurements: Note that with CDMA terminals. SMS Testing with CDMA terminals  Note that the SMS testing functionality may depend on your terminal's software version. You can view. MMS TESTING MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing include LG C680. 6. In order to be able to make MMS measurements. From the Measurement menu. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay.

6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing. Some special MMS settings are required. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. the script must not contain a PDP activation command. This setting is operator-specific.MMS dialog by double-clicking the Multimedia Messaging Service item in the Devices view. all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements. Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements. MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. please see page 142.140 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   If you are using the Nokia 6630. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring. All the parameters in the Packet Session and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator-specific. This setting is operator-specific. Packet Session Settings for MMS Open the Packet Session Settings . Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated. The MMS tab is opened by default. This setting is operator-specific. MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. MMS In the MMS tab. Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 141 Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated. New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor. Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement. MMS Editor Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message. Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use. Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. . Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use. Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use. Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages. Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message.

 Making MMS measurements: 1. If you want to make automated measurements. This will start the measurement. On the phone main window. You can view. that is. If you are using a script. activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New).135). If you are making manual measurements.   You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated. MMS Settings for Nokia 6630. Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). and N80 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor. 2. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor (p. 6680. 6. 5. create a script for MMS measurements (p. and N80: 1. please see page 142.140). 4. press Messag. 6680.141). Some special MMS settings are required. If you are using the Nokia 6630. for example. from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (p.142 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Making MMS Measurements Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testingrelated events. 6680. and N80 You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia 6630. Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. . Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS. 3. not using a script. select Send MMS Message from the Measurement control menu or from the Measurement menu.  Changing MMS settings for Nokia 6630. 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing.

4.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 143 2. select Settings. 3. select Multimedia message. In the Messaging view. From the Settings view. press Options. From the menu. .

and change it to Off. 8.144 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5. . in home net. Select the Reception if roaming option and change it to Off. Select the Recept. 6. Finally switch the mobile on and off. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. 7.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 145 MMS Settings for Nokia N95. press Options. 2.  Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95. press Messaging. 6120. On the phone main window. In the Messaging view. and 6121 You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95. 6120. and 6121: 1. and 6121 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor. 6120.

From the menu. 5.146 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. From the Settings view. select Settings. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None. . 4. select Multimedia message.

Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off. Select Allow anon. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone. or by selecting Options| Change| No.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 147 6. Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No. 8. 7. msgs. .

The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are not built into Nemo Outdoor. START EXTERNAL APPLICATION This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the automatic measurement sequence. Finally switch the mobile off and on. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP data throughput parameter. This enables. The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. Add menu. An APP event is written to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. Select Start External Application from the menu. 10. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. . The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor.148 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 9. You can define the executable as well as the command-line parameters. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No. The user must set the cache size to minimum from the browser settings. the testing of data protocols that are not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. for example.

it determines the size of the reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor. Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged. also define where the delay will occur. The options are: . In addition to the duration. Define the path where the application . ICMP PING The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping measurements simultaneously with data transfers. the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter (=-1). Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time.exe file is located on your computer.exe. Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds.com. if you start Internet Explorer. For example.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 149 Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making measurements. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. In addition.com/nemo). If this time is exceeded. the test script will be on hold until the external application is closed. define here a URL (http://www. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field. For example. The value determines the size of the packet sent to the server.anite. www. C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. for example. Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started. For example. C:\Temp. Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server. Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files.anite. If you select the Wait until completed option. You can also leave the field empty.

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. If the delay is less than the ping delay.  To make ping measurements: 1. a new request is sent every 1000ms. 3. New request is sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). 5. Click the Start Recording button . . 4. If “delay between request” is selected. select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement.150 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending new request. 2. Open the Ping Settings dialog by double-clicking the ICMP Ping item in the Devices view. Example 1. select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog. Define the required ping parameters and click OK.1s (100ms + 1000ms). Wait until the status field in the Device Status window says ‘PDP Context Activated’. New request is sent every 1. Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you stop it manually.  Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping measurement is repeated. If “delay between request” is selected. a new request is sent immediately after the reply. a new request is sent every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request. In the Devices view. Otherwise. the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times. From the Measurement control menu. Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received. click on the Measurement control button and select Start Packet Session.

network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. Select the NM32_x86_setup. . double-click on it. In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor. A separate log file is generated for each test terminal making data transfers. you must configure a dial-up connection (see the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for more information) and install the Network Monitor driver for the dial-up connection. With IP packet capturing.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 151 IP PACKET CAPTURING  Note that the Microsoft Network Manager needs to be installed on your computer BEFORE installing Nemo Outdoor! If you do not select this option. 1. go to Microsoft website at <http://www.com/downloads/details. Click Yes to continue installation.exe installation file and click on Download.microsoft. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.2 dialog appears. Once the installation file is downloaded.aspx?familyid=f4db40af-1e08-4a21-a26bec2f4dc4190d&displaylang=en> to download the free Network Monitor installation package. After setting up the dial-up connection. it will NOT be possible to install Network Manager after Nemo Outdoor installation.

. Click Next in the Welcome dialog. 3. In the End-User License Agreement dialog select I accept the terms in the License Agreement option. and click Next.152 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2.

5. . It is recommended to select the Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended) option. Click Next to continue with installation.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 153 4. Select Typical in the Choose Setup Type dialog that appears.

and go to the Measurement Properties. install Nemo Outdoor. add a device. Start Nemo Outdoor. . select the Enable IP Capture option. In the Advanced Properties dialog. General page. 8. Click the Advanced button. Next.154 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. 9. Click Install in the Ready to install dialog. Click Finish in the Completing the Setup Wizard dialog. 7.

  Performing IP Packet Capturing: Network Monitor needs to be installed prior to installing Nemo Outdoor for IP packet capturing to show in Nemo Outdoor.pcap) for each measurement terminal and the data can be analyzed with Ethereal. A separate .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 155  Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list. 1. you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. Set up a dial-up connection (see Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions). 3. enable IP capturing in the Advanced Properties dialog. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. In Nemo Outdoor.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is enabled. IP packet capturing data is stored in a separate file (.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. 2.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (. the Network Monitor driver is not installed. .

See the following chapter for an explanation of the different items under the Add button. Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements. the settings that have been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. . if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties – Configuration dialog. Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script. The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10. in the Devices view and The table in the middle shows a list of all the functions and parameters that will be executed during a measurement. For example. You can access this dialog by clicking the Device script settings button clicking the Script Editor button.156 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MAKING SCRIPT FILES  Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners. The extension for all Script files is . Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script. The selected item is added to the script. Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script. You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script Editor dialog. that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear. You can choose any of the items in the list that opens when you click the Add button. Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected.nsf. The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. Select a row from the table and click the button to change the settings for that function. Delete deletes the selected entry row.000.

Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed. Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm  triggers the IF string 2. the IF condition is triggered. the IF condition is triggered. which means that when starting the measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received. Carrier RSSI value -68dBm  Triggers the IF string . The reference value is unknown. 1.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 157 New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value. Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one.  Notes about script functions:   Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF loop Examples of conditions: o “Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm  Whenever the value is other than -70dBm. opens a dialog for inserting the file name. Close exits the dialog. For example. IF condition is triggered o “Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed  Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes. Carrier RSSI value -70dBm  nothing happens 3.

158 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Script Transfer Stop Commands With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect. e. The call is ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds. if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to UMTS. the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. or at most 120 seconds. . whichever comes first. For example. For example. If a data transfer is not completed during a userdefined time. the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes. with voice calls. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three. Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes. can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait commands as well. After the call is connected. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS. GSM voice call example. The forced stop command. instead of waiting for its completion.g. or when system changes to UMTS.. the script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS. the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. In the example below. Call duration is set to 120 seconds.

the voice call would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred. In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. . Once the system is in UMTS. or after 60 seconds.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 159 The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. voice call is continued. whichever comes first. If line eight were End a voice call (forced). In the example below the script waits until the system changes to UMTS. the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call duration is reached. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM. If the system changes to GSM before 60 seconds. The call duration is 60 seconds. the script waits 5 seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer. waiting until the system changes to GSM. or after 60 seconds. The script stops. The data transfer is aborted when the system changes to GSM. but at most for 60 seconds.

or after 60 seconds.160 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. . whichever comes first. or after 60 seconds. but data transfer is continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command. The data transfer and voice call are aborted when the system changes to GSM. The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM.

g. make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones. Selecting an item may open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. This command can only be used during voice calls.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 161 Add Menu The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. . In the Script Editor. See earlier chapters for more detailed information on the dialogs. by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send DTMF sequences. The Start External Application item is described in more detail on page 142. You can e.

With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points inside the script file. The idea is to start FTP download simultaneously. With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different conditions for the wait. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings dialog. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices. Both synchronization methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user. select Wait.162 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Wait Settings To add pauses in the script. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”. .

you can set a 10 second pause after a voice call is finished and before the next call starts. As many synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. This will prevent the script from continuing before the call attempt has completed. The until: Current system option enables you to define that the script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down menu is in use. For example. . But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not appear. With the Next notification option you can make the script wait for a certain event notification to appear. For example. 2. It should be noted that the number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal. such as. you can make the script pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. With the Last notification option you can define a wait period after certain event notifications. call attempt. For example. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a certain event notification. In this example. define also the maximum wait time in seconds after which the script will continue.  Adding a pause in the script file: 1. With the Current time option you can define a pause between items in the script. it is not necessary to use the script group. 3.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 163 Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be synchronized. First define the wait time in seconds. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option.  Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here. you can make the script wait until the system changes from GSM to UMTS.

and move them to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs.=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria set in this dialog are met. If you want to remove the condition from the list. Click OK.End If block in the script takes place. In the following example script. In the Condition and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the commands inside the If-End If block to take place. Outdoor will perform the set of commands within the If . Next. If the criteria are met.164 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Advanced Conditional Blocks By selecting Advanced | If/End If. select it and click Remove. you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog.End If block. Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. Here you can define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If . Serving sys. the commands between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. and if the criteria are not met. this set of commands will be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command. add commands to the script from the Add menu. Click Add to list to add the condition to the list. In this example the serving system must be UMTS FDD. .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 165 Loops You can add loops in the script files. By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop. you will enter the Loop Settings dialog. You can select from the following loop options:  Repeat the loop x times .

You can move the commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. . the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script. Click the Field button to select a parameter. Click OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. In the first example.166 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual    Repeat the loop for x minutes Repeat the loop until the time is x Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for the loop to take place. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script. Then define the condition and value for the selected parameter.

the call stops.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 167 The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be repeated. In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been selected from the Field drop-down menu. As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs to be greater or equal to -5. In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the call is connected to UMTS. The commands inside the loop block will be performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5. Click Add to list and OK. .

Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button . General dialog (see p. Scripts dialog. 3.168 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Running Scripts After you have created a script. After the script is finished. Nemo Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button. it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on. Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in the User Interface Properties. In the Measurement Properties. select the script in the Script File field.51). The script can be different for each device. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file. you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button ).  To run the script file: 1. 2. . Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement according to the script file.

For example. %a %A %b Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name .g. You can also use measurement lists in idle mode. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after another. In Online mode. Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists. measurement list files (*. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. Filename defines the filename format. Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement list is started.. By default. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 169 MEASUREMENT LISTS Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining multiple scripts. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds. "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file.nmix) are saved to Configuration files folder. 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. e. Click Add New to add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list. select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List dialog.

depending on registry settings./P. as decimal number (00 – 99) Year with century. no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a certain period of time. with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6. with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53) Year without century. no characters if time zone is unknown %Z Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished. Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files reaches a certain limit. Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number.M. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm). . as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. depending on registry settings. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 – 59) Week of year as decimal number.    Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running.Script dialog.170 Nemo O ut door User M a nual %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366) Month as decimal number (01 – 12) Minute as decimal number (00 – 59) Sequence number (1 – ) Sequence number (1 – ) Current locale's A. Click the Script Editor button to edit the selected script. Script file defines the script file used in the measurement. Start runs the measurement list.M. Define the size in kilobits (KB). Properties opens the Measurement Properties . Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

click Save.    To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel: Note that when the channel lock is activated. FORCING FUNCTIONS Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user interface. 7. Finally. the connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station. 3. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement. In addition to these. Note that if you are using the single mode. you must switch the mobile on manually. Select a device from the Devices list. the Neighbor Stations window displays only Serving Cell values. Select the When all scripts are completed option. Channel Locking  This functionality is available for GSM and UMTS mobiles only. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list. If the mobile is not connected to the power cord and the program switches it off. you must keep the test mobile connected to the power cord. some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via the mobile keypad. In other words. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously. You can lock GSM and UMTS test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process. 5. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features available for each terminal. 6. 2. you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a call. Select a script from the Script File field. the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 171  Creating a measurement list: 1. . click Start. To save the measurement list. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script Editor button. 4.

Click the Unlock button in the Forcing functions | Channel locking dialog to release the channel lock. The button will remain pushed down indicating that channel lock is activated. select the device and click the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and select Channel Locking.172 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 1. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. 3. Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. 2. . The Channel Locking dialog will appear on your screen. When you have connected the measurement device.

To release the band lock. A red indicator will appear in the Device Status view when a lock is activated. You can open the Band Locking dialog by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Band Locking. This will lock the mobile to the band/system you have chosen. you can force the mobile to use only one band or system at a time. open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button. You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and systems. . Click Close to exit the dialog. You will need to switch the mobile off and on to activate the band lock. The band lock will be released after you switch the mobile power off and on. Using the Band Locking dialog.  Always remember to switch the mobile power off and on again to activate/deactivate the band lock.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 173 Band Locking  This functionality is available only with GSM mobiles. Choose a band or system from the list and click the Lock button.

e. i. If the terminal accepts the command made by the user. as you can. The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell. send a new Handover Forcing command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. Open the Handover Control dialog (Measurement settings button | Handover Control).e. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP. for example. Handover forcing and Handover suppression. the corresponding button will indicate this. Start a measurement and initiate a call (Measurement control button | Start Voice Call). It is also possible to send the same command several times without clicking other commands (i. Define the channel and handover type and click OK. The user has three mode request commands. force a handover to every neighbor cell. and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP) . or in GSM to a different channel without first deactivating HO forcing). the device can be forced to scrambling code 6. Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets. You do not have to wait for the mobile to make handovers. the user can set a new target cell and press the Handover forcing button again. the user is notified. Normal mode. The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the handover to. If the command fails. code. For example.174 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Handover Control  This functionality is available only with certain Nokia terminals. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6.

In case the current serving system is GSM. forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally. band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA. . but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA. The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM or WCDMA. the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 175 During Normal mode. When the serving system is GSM.

the terminal active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.176 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user. By pressing the Handover forcing button. in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. handover mode can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Scrambling code 6 is selected to be a target cell. Scrambling code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. Handover forcing is done by biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. For example. . In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification. the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user. When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values.6dB shown as a brown curve. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active cell.

the terminal starts reporting unbiased values. Once the mode is changed back to normal. Scrambling code 6 is seen with Ec/N0 value -18. scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value -4. This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled.7dB.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 177 Once the button is pressed.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set. Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB. . The device sends measurement reports to the network with biased values.

the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to other cells. .  Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. See Making Scripts on page 156.178 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual When the Handover suppression button is pressed. for example. You can use this feature. Biasing/ measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when driving away from a base station. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA.

During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end users (Accept). With the Nemo Outdoor GSM measurement mobiles you can also access barred cells. that is. all cells.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 179 Cell Barring  This functionality is available for GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only. and only barred cells (Reverse). The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Barring. . also cells that are barred (Ignore). You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Barring.

the test starts with a voice connection attempt. The Cell Testing dialog is accessed by selecting the device and clicking the Measurement settings button in the Devices view and choosing Cell Testing. If the user selects both. During the call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated.180 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CELL TESTING The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked to a cell at a time. Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell or to packet call testing . without this call the neighbour list may remain empty. This is necessary since if the cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one. and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the cell. no Packet call settings are displayed RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell. For example. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Testing. only cells that are stronger than this value will be included in the test Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if no voice connection is formed. only cells stronger than the value defined here will be included in the test Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. if Voice call is selected.

You have three options in which to perform missing neighbor detection: 1. the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection functionality. Hence. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile. and the number the number of attempts.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 181 Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency. a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a given time. Missing neighbor measurements are also supported on some Nokia terminals. and inter-system cells. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. The green color indicates successful attempts. The Test results page shows the progress of the test. with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection. inter-frequency. . 2. a scanner. MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION Real‐time missing neighbor detection can be performed with the possibility to detect both GSM/WCDMA and CDMA missing neighbors at the same time. a scanner and a mobile. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements. or 3. A terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list. but is detected/measured by the scanner. whereas a scanner measures all available cells.

182 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Missing Neighbor Detection with a Mobile 1. select the device and click the Measurement control button . Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor. click on Select Channels. 2. Select Frequency Scanning Properties. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the Frequency scanning view. Next. . In the Devices view.  Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to be selected and Top-N option deselected.

click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 183 4. Click OK and OK. click the Add All button. To add channels to the Selected list. Once the selected scans have been performed. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already. and select Measurement control | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning. . Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected missing neighbors. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. 5. 7. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. 6. To select all available channels for scanning.

A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list. If the measured RX level is below the threshold. such as. RX level: -50. However. the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. default -95dBm . You can observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters.-110dBm.   Number of missing neighbors: Max. difference to strongest. Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and. Ec/N0. In GSM Missing Neighbor detection. the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. the channel is not detected as a missing neighbor. The field displays the scanner(s) used. 32. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection. From Measurement | <device name>. reports the neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. default 3. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing neighbor. Configure the devices so that they are measuring the same frequency and channels.184 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile You will need a scanner or a scanner and a mobile. and RSCP related to the missing neighbors. Note that missing neighbor detection using a scanner only is not available for CDMA/EVDO. note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results. select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. based on the data. Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. If you are performing missing neighbor detection with a scanner only.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 185 Open a bar graph. . click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface. PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS Available for UMTS. Right-click on the device in the Devices view and select Pilot Pollution Analysis. for example. with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New. CDMA and EV-DO networks. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network from one another. The bar graph with the selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s). Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver. In a pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure. and analysis is always active. or there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match.

Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/I0 value. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own. The event includes the following information:         Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/N0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) . RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm.186 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button . The pilot count includes active and monitored sets. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB. RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 95dBm. Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB. For example. pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/N0 value. Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. Pilot count includes active and neighbor sets. Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 12dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm. For example. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB. Pilot count threshold (for CDMA and EV-DO): The default value is set to 3. pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. called ”CELLPOLLUTION”.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 187  NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the moment.  Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen. and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.

Mobile Phones Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own. The event includes the following information:         Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/I0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) . called ”CELLPOLLUTION”.188 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements   Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis .

and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events. or it can be also from out of band in some circumstances. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 189  Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher. system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference. ETSI 05. CDMA/EV-DO Pilot Pollution Analysis . and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel interference with voice.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:     Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB 200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB 400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB 600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB .Scanners   Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value GSM INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS In GSM mobile communication networks. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel. or adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal.

During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. With RX level and RX quality. Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals.190 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and playback with Nemo Outdoor. or BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. Please note that all test terminals do not report C/I value. For example. RX quality and C/I values. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information.g. the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:  RX level sub and RX quality sub. when AMR speech codec is used. If frequency hopping is used. the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning receiver. OR RX level sub and C/I These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference analysis. A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. missing neighbor detection.1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. e. The user can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. as with. RX level sub. Default values are:    RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm) RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4) Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB) The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:     Terminal serving channel number or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping Cell ID RX level sub . During dedicated mode. Once triggering is done. the sub values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used. C/I average value is used. GSM terminal continuously reports RX level. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ . In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel. The user must enable interference analysis similarly. RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed.

RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1) Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows for GSM interference analysis. for example. in a table grid and bar graph. RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1) Channel number. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be seen during the measurement and playback. the following data is extracted from scanner measurements and written to terminal measurement file:    Channel number. . RX level and BSIC for channel X Channel number.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 191   RX quality sub C/I if available For each terminal serving channel number X. Table grid and bar graph.

LTE Cell ID) for every valid channel of that technology type are reported. Finally press the Start Scan button. Signal strength and signal quality are reported for each identified channel. Select the technologies and bands that you want to be scanned and define the threshold levels for the parameters available. All specified channels are scanned for the selected band and technology and the strongest measured identifiers (CDMA PN. Available technologies and bands supported by the scanner are shown under Scan settings. WCDMA SC. EV-DO PN. 1800 and WCDMA 2100 bands. right click the Nemo FSR1 item in the Devices view and select Band Scan. To start a band scan. This feature is useful in areas where broadcasted technologies and bands are unknown. Please note that only licensed technologies (systems) are shown.192 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual BAND SCAN With the Nemo FSR1 scanner you can perform band scanning. . The scanning rate can be increased by adjusting the threshold values. With the default threshold values it takes approximately two minutes and 30 seconds to scan GSM 900.

It is possible to save the results to a text file (.csv). .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 193 Scanning results are displayed on the Scan results page.

Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel.194 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual TIMESLOT TESTING  This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only.  Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option. This must be a valid number. the test may continue indefinitely. With Nemo Outdoor. . The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last. Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested. Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog will be opened.

all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from the test by selecting them (grey). Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. Green color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called. When there are no more white slots left. for example. and the number in the slot the number of calls made in the timeslot. the measurement will stop on its own.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 195 In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test. This happens. . Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. Click on the … button to enter the Select Channel dialog. if the user stops the testing. i. Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test.e. The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their timeslots. in the case they are already reserved for data testing. On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. for example. Selecting timeslots will exclude them from the test. Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing.

196 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING GRAPHS There are four types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor: line and scatter graphs. and vertical and horizontal bar graphs. There are some pre-made custom windows of each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. To open an empty graph. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. See page 315 for opening custom windows. . select Data | [graph type] | New. It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it.

The Parameters view contents can be filtered using the Parameters and Windows buttons. . After this. Clear the Windows button. The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 197 Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. and all the custom windows will be hidden. Clear the Parameters button. Graph Popup Menu Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the graph. First. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. and all parameters will be hidden. right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the parameter to be opened.

Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. See page 302 for more information on view groups. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. For example. the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement. Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a . . The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. if you select LTE FDD.jpg image.198 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above).

Autoscroll Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the graph view scroll as the measurement progresses. This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 199 Graph Properties Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph Properties dialog. Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter full screen mode. the axis changes depending on the active layer. Select parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button . Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the bar in the graph. You can also define different parameters for the axes. Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. If you select Default. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button . Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button . Edit Parameters By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog.

. To zoom out. This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters.Scatter Graph To zoom in on a scatter graph. Layers Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel. Zoom . dragging the mouse from a red dot to a green dot. and down arrow buttons The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. Full Screen Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot towards the corners with the red dots. Use the up to move the parameters in the editing field. do the same in reverse.200 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. Side Panel Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. Values Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel. You can also open it by clicking the Side Panel dialog button .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 201 .

202 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Graph Side Panel . a layer can be dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button to remove the layer. For example. The layer is now removed. . The order of the layers can also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.Layers The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons.

You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view. Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 203 To create space in the graph side panel. . To reopen the view. right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu. you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of the Layers view.

Remove Group. The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.204 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grouping Layers The New Group. Layer groups can be used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph. Move Group Up. Rename Group. Move Group Down and Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. .

The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 205 Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

such as. Define the layer properties. You can also assign the parameter into a layer group. New Layer The New Layer command creates a new layer. See Layer Properties on page 207 for more detailed information. line style and color.206 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Groups can be removed. renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and drag and drop parameters into the group. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog. Select a parameter in the Y or X field. .

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 207 Hide Layer The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer. The dialog can also be accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. 100 = totally transparent) Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or fixed color set. Line width defines the line thickness in pixels Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs" appearance) or one straight line Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Remove Layer The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer. Data can be sorted based on descending or ascending order Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque. or whether a color set based on parameter values is used. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. 212 for more information on graph layer color configuration. See p. Layer Properties Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. . The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the selected layer.

The data tip will display information from that point of time. below bottom three RX levels are shown. so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed.. Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale.208 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Window size defines the number of values to be averaged Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the user.. if the list is empty. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar..g. E. for example. this is not used Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. Such graphs include also the following layer properties. If the list is empty. If 0. If the list is empty. appropriate filtering is not used so that it is possible to filter only channels. Such parameters are. E. Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. this is not used Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the userdefined limits for a measurement result is set.g. Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the instantaneous values in the graph Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency. only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. If Automatic scale is set to Yes..). Automatic scale also needs to be set to No. RACH TX Power. only pilots or both Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or…). If Automatic scale is set to Yes. no filtering is used TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. if Automatic scale is set to No. no filtering is used Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below or above the minimum and maximum values. RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count. no filtering is used TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter.. . it is possible to define various filters: Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or.. Some of the graph types support data tips. Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu.). Depending on the parameter.

Arrow Down/Up The Arrow Down and Arrow Up icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph panel.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 209 In the following example three RACH parameters are shown in the graph. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view with the mouse. and each of them has a different point style. .

Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. and double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties.210 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Layer Device Selection The Layer Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. If a given parameter value consists of more than one value. . Layers can be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. The Layer Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately. a separate parameter window appears. Select a layer in the Layers view.

In the example below all views are separate. the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter and its values. beside. Click the exit icon at the top to close the view.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 211 In the example above. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected. By clicking the maximize icon at the upper right-hand corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values. above or below each other. For example. . in the example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view. You can also drag and drop the Values and Parameter views inside.

as different colors can be assigned e. cell ID.g. scrambling codes. . you can access the Edit Parameters dialog (see page 199). add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree.212 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By right-clicking on the Values view. double-click on a layer in the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog. to different channels.. First. etc. Next. and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters. Graph Layer Color Configuration Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs.

Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color automatically. If you choose Fixed color. Define the fixed color by selecting it in the Standard or Custom page. Click OK. The graph will be colored based on the fixed color you selected.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 213 If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph. or define the RGB for the color. . click … to enter the Colors dialog.

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set parameter menu. . and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu.214 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and Color set fields.

click on Edit Color Set. button. See Color Set Editor on page 273 for more information. Each BSIC is presented with its own color. It will lead you to the Color Set Properties dialog. . In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers..D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 215 To edit the color set in question. The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph. Here you can edit the color set selected. the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color.

216 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Similarly. and channels without BSIC information are shown with black color. . All channels with BSIC information appear in green color. the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 217 The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers. .

All events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices at the same time. such as statistics from the current measurement. QoS parameters. . If you select one of the readymade custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.218 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING GRIDS Along with the graph windows. you need to enable the packet decoding function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to performing data measurements. Click on the parameter and drag it in the grid. A separate .3 to be installed. in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as separate columns. select Decode Message in New Window option. Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the selection depends on the technology measured). In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window. and packet capture data. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor 3. the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events. you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. Alternatively. and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. The options listed in the grid popup menu will be introduced next. you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message. You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. To open several decoded message windows. It will be added there. However. An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field.

Select the grid view. press Ctrl + F. the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid. and type the search string in the Search string field in the Find dialog. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the Direction field. . Grid Popup Menu Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 219 Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its decoded message.

The new custom window is added under the User Interface. You can also access this dialog from the Data menu. See page 302 for more information on view groups. and colors. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog. Alternatively. If you want to colorize the background. e. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is opened. parameters displayed. Automatic Scrolling Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement progresses. and select Configure Colors from the popup menu. Save Changes Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column.220 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Save As Custom Window Right-click on a grid table and choose Save As Custom Window from the popup menu.. The dialog below is opened. as in the example below. You can use this dialog to save a custom window with a name. .  Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices. Right-click on the item to rename the custom window. Custom Windows item in the Configuration Manager dialog. Right-click on a grid. if you want to colorize only the text in the grid. You can set a text color and/or a background color for the selected events. you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event ID. select Call Events (Event name) in the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids To make grids more clear. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. or click on the Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog. size. select Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set field.g.

Here you can also add more strings to the color set through Add… .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 221 Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog. Make sure that the color set type is string.

in that case remember to create two new color sets for the same string. In this case. it is also possible to color-code both text and background. for example. Finally. Each color corresponds to a certain type of event. defined in the Color Set Properties dialog. you can have a message appear in white text and blue background color. If you want.222 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color code for it. Below you will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field. you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p. Grid Color Configuration Based on Decoded Message in Grids Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a message’s decoded message. However. It is possible to color-code both the text in the grid and the background color. For example. While you can choose to colorize only one of them. Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. click OK in the Grid Color Configuration dialog. Click Add… .273).

Decoded Text in the Name field. Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages to be colored with the new color set. You can also create a short name for the new color set. Select string as the color set type.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 223 In the Color Set Properties dialog type. for example. or write a description for it. .

. so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field. Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. Click OK. If you want to colorize only the text. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or the background color.224 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click OK. select the new color set created above. in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. and Close in the Color Set Editor. and Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. In this example the background will be color-coded. Decoded Text.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 225 All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text color set. .

or both. Further. Click OK.226 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids Based on Message Name Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same message name. when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p. 273) | Color Set Properties | String Properties. Color-coding a message based on its name is done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message. both the message text and background will be colorized. However. you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string in the decoded message. Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs. You can color-code the message text or the background color. .

right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors. All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets. or select Configure Colors in the Grid Properties dialog. Click OK. . Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the Background Color Set field.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 227 Next.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. .228 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grid Color Configuration for Parameter Grids Grids can be made clearer through colors. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid. Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field. note that you need to use two different color sets for it. The Clear All button inactivates the default color sets. You can choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set dropdown menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the text/values in the grid.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 229 You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit… In the Color Set Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.

230 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. . In the example below a background of the parameter values has been color-coded. Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color Configuration dialog.

In the Grid Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. and Edit… The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets. . Click OK to exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid. You can also edit the default color sets.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 231 Grid Color Configuration for Table Grids Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Right-click on the grid. select Configure Colors… the parameter you wish to edit. Go to Data | Table Grid | New. Click OK.

only the selected messages will be displayed. Configure Filters/Quick Filter Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters.232 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used simultaneously. By using filters. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu .

. A conditional row appears giving It is possible to set filtering rules for message name. subchannel and decoded text. In addition. you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu. select hiding all lines. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others. Select the Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. button. Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus you options based on which the grid filtering takes place. If you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others. The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened. select showing all lines.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 233 .

The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18. If a condition has two or more constituents. the plus icon next to the first constituent needs to be clicked. independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon at the top left-hand corner of the dialog. . a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that is less than -5. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one another with the text and if. Note also that a separate. In the example above. and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place.234 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected. the message is filtered out from the grid.

When filtering is enabled. you can choose to display messages of the selected type only. Right-click on a row in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu. The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. If you move forward or back in the message decoding grid. Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules. use the Go to Message button to move to the same message in the messages grid. In the same way. All messages with the selected event. subchannel name or message text will be hidden. In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 235 The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Alternatively. Decode Message This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. it is also possible to arrange the contents of the decoded message in three different ways. With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS). You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event). . You can also decode messages by double-clicking on the message row. the text Filtering will appear in the title bar. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the message decoding grid as text to clipboard. you can delete all filters by rightclicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu. subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message.

right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as text to the clipboard. This is the same as the Copy to Clipboard functionality. . The Format as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns. all text in it will be copied.236 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Format as list arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window. If no text is selected in the decoded text window. and the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. Select a string of text in the decoded text.

In an Events grid. If you select the Decoded Text option.jpg). Select the parameters that you would like to include in the . Also define a File name and Layer title for the exported .Grid The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (.tab file.txt). . You can also save the entire grid window as an image file (.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 237 Decode Message in New Window This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time. select Save | MapInfo Tab-File.tab file. the decoded event text is saved in a text file. From Events grids. Save . you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into a CSV file. MapInfo Tab-File Export You can export measurement data into a MapInfo . The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters that can be exported. Automatic Decode The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest message in decoded form.tab file.

. .238 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual To change the symbol for each parameter. In an Events grid. you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it.tab file. double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click the Change Symbol button. Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the . CSV File Export You can export measurement data into a CSV file. select Save | CSV File. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo. In the Symbol Style dialog. Finally click OK.

The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. You can also limit the search to decoded messages only. To move down to the next match. Indoor files are not supported at the moment.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 239 The exporting is supported for a single file. Find The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid. To move up to the next match. You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application. . and the column separator can be a comma. Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. for example. to be exported. tab or space. semicolon. the decoded event text is copied on the clipboard. Select All Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. Define if the search results should match case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. If you select the Decoded Text option. Copy The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text or as decoded text. press Shift+F3. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications. press F3. This presents an easy and quick way to select all lines.

You can choose a statistic or a parameter and add an open space (a separator) above it by first clicking it and then choosing the Add Separator option from the popup menu. .  Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view  Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)  Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)  Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Add/Remove Separator The Add/Remove Separator option is relevant only with parameters and Statistics grids. Right-click on a grid table and choose Add/Remove Separator from the popup menu. Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view.240 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window. Full Screen The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. You can remove the separator by clicking the open space and choosing Remove Separator from the popup menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 241 Grid Properties Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. Select the parameters that you would like to view in the grid and click OK.). all the parameters under UMTS are selected. for example. The available parameters are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. the UMTS option. Voice. Click the Configure Colors button to access the Grid Color Configuration dialog. In the Selected tab you can view which parameters you have selected and change their order using the arrow buttons. You can select the events. parameters. You can also select individual parameters. and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. Expand the branch by double-clicking on the main item (GSM. The Grid Properties dialog is opened. UMTS. . etc.  Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type and on the measurement device. If you select.

Click the Add button to define new parameters. Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched. Ordered MS power level. After you have defined all the parameters. Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages. expand the User Parameters item. Click the User Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog. . for example. Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded. Click OK to exit the dialog. The new parameter is added to the list in the Layer Parameters dialog. In the Parameters dialog.242 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual User Parameters The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Status window or in graphs. click OK. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK.

xml. . It is possible.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 243 The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters. User Parameters can be searched in messages grids. to search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message. for example. The user can also perform more complex searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data.

To export user parameters. go to File | Export Settings in Nemo Outdoor. and click OK. Scroll to the User Parameters folder. . The exported parameters will be saved on this file.aex file on your PC. the Export Settings dialog appears. Save the . You can also select other items to be exported in the dialog. The user parameters previously created are listed under the folder. 2. Select the ones you wish to export. Next. 1.244 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Exporting/Importing User Parameters  Exporting user parameters It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor.

2. To import user parameters. Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.aex file that you saved earlier.  Importing user parameters 1. The selected user parameters and possible other items that you selected in the Export Settings dialog are now saved in the . select File | Import Settings in Nemo Outdoor.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 245 3. .

Click OK. . If there already is a user parameter with the same name saved.  Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. The user parameters are now saved and are shown in the Nemo Outdoor parameter tree under User Parameters. It is possible to view selected parameters in map by drag and dropping them in it. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. Paths tab. First. After this. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu. For information on Indoor measurements. VIEWING MAPS Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. See page 333 for a description of the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons. Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the User Interface Properties dialog. the imported user parameter will replace it. refer to page 281.246 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the popup menu when right-clicking on the map.

Note that the BTS file is displayed only if there is a measurement file loaded on the map as well. A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all location-specific data. You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. When using vector data for MapInfo®. While viewing notifications on a map. .gst) and loaded later on. the image file is the actual map image file. the BTS name will be truncated with “…” In this case.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor. hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number. Hover your mouse over the base station icon to see more information about the BTS. (Only for raster images). and the . click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells.tab file contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular map. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. . The corresponding image and . When MapInfo raster maps are used. The . If there is no GPS connected to the system.mbx) that ships with version 5. such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location. MapInfo Workspaces (*.gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset. the distance to the serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window. . but can be saved as a . updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions.x of MapInfo Professional. A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station.tab. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16. If you select a BTS file (. or turning the color map to black and white.id file. Also. The BTS icons display the antennas.tab file. .wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapX.tab files for Raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 247 If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system. and directions that the antennas point to. there are three different files that need to be in the same directory. the base stations will be displayed. the current location of the test vehicle will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route. the channel numbers for the antennas.map. The customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gif.nbf) for the measurement file. If you are using a large map (size over 1 Mb). The antennas are drawn in one degree steps.tif. This file (. the .  Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS.jpg) and a . you can define the current location manually. Note that each MapInfo® map has two files: an image file (.

248 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Side Panel .

. for example. You can drag each view to different places on the map as well. The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. and you want to view all the routes in the Layers view and all the color legends in the Color legends view.263). See the Route Plans chapter below for more information on waypoints. it will resume its original position in the side panel. or click on the X button next to the option to delete the layer. and Waypoints in the popup menu to view the three items above. and the item indicates a route plan. Right-click on a map and select Color Legend. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. when a multi measurement is loaded.263). If you have loaded a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map. and you can also add a new route or a new BTS file from the popup menu or directly from the Layers view. the item indicates a base station file connected to the measurement route. See page 273 on how to create and edit color sets. The Waypoints view is meant for controlling route plans. The Add route functionality is useful. When you right-click on a layer. Through the Properties item you can access the layer’s Properties dialog (see p. Double-click on an item to access its Properties dialog (see p. or dock it to another side of the map window following the arrows that appear when you drag the window. the following popup menu appears: In the popup menu you can select whether or not you want to show or delete a layer. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. When you double-click on the displaced view. You can also clear the option next to the layer item if you do not want to view it. Layers. the color legends will be shown next to one another in this view. You can view three different kinds of items in the Layers view. You can also access the Properties dialog by right-clicking on the item and selecting Properties in the popup menu. The item indicates a devicespecific measurement route on the map.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 249 The contents of the map side panel depend on which items have been selected in the map popup menu.

You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode. You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (. Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline mode. you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in the map side panel. or alternatively you can open a map manually from Data | Map | New. .rpf). and is ready to be used in a measurement.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next. In addition. If you have previously created and saved a route plan (.rpf).250 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Route Plans Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views. you can open it through the Open Route Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Open Route Plan from the popup menu. and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window. or you can manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. The route plan (. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see page 39) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window. you can save them as a custom window for later use.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 251 You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. not during playback. If you clear the Show next waypoint option. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu. A new route plan (. The Show next waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a measurement. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle mode. . or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu. and the Waypoints view is enabled. and clicking on the map.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items will also be disabled.

To select a waypoint on the map. click on the Select button in the Waypoints view. and the Distance to next waypoint field will display the appropriate distance in meters to the next waypoint. If you click on Delete. then select a waypoint on the map. the next waypoint on the route will be selected. The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current position on the route. the next waypoint is selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar. . In addition. Reclick on Select to clear the functionality. the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected.252 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Waypoint detection radius slide bar indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is selected. so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint on the route plan. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement. You can make changes to the route plan through the four buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view. and the previous waypoint on the route will automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. the selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. Moreover. the Delete button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map.

Click on the Move button.rpf”). load a measurement file and open a map window. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created. and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar. The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. If you click on either button when they are inactive. The route plan should now be visible on the map. they will both be activated. then selecting a specific waypoint on the map. you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan. you can create a route plan from a measurement. . When you select either. the layer list should have a new layer (“Untitled. or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS coordinates. and conversely if you click on either button when active. or by selecting it in the map popup menu.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 253 You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select. they will become inactive. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be enabled. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon. Right-click on the map and select View Entire Route. Start Nemo Outdoor. Creating and Saving Route Plans from a Measurement In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints. or select the option from the map popup menu.

Change the settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel. Move. Note that when you click on Select. You will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window]. However. Saving a Route Plan to a Custom Window When you create a route plan and save it. the properties should be what you set them to. and select Map | [name of custom window]. double-click on the route plan in the map side panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog. See page 250 for more information on how to use the control buttons. First. and you want to save these changes. you need to save the map window as a custom window. you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all the circles. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. right-click on the map. change the properties and click OK. you may need to zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. When you open a measurement the next time. and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan during a measurement. if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific properties. When you open the properties dialog. and select Save As Custom Window in the map popup menu. Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Next. .254 Nemo O ut door User M a nual You can also modify the route plan with the Select.rpf). and save it. create or open a route plan. the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File (.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 255 Map Popup Menu Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. if you select LTE FDD.jpg image. Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a . Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Save as MapInfo Tab-file Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format. Save as CSV File Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format. the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement. For example.256 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. .

colors based on selected parameter. Open Route Plan Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map. Open Map By selecting the Open Map item. Nemo Outdoor will view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. you can open existing map files (. Save Route Plan The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use. See page 302 for more information on view groups. you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name. In this way you have the possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes.tab). Add Waypoints Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 257 Export to Google Earth By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route. Find Map at Position When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item. and base station information to Google Earth .kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application. . notifications. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking on the Browse button and browsing your local folders. Save Map By selecting the Save Map item. Create Route Plan The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.

Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback. Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Tool Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. It cannot be used during playback.keyboard buttons. Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel and the + and . Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow. Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. .258 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Find Cell With Find cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter.

This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement. Auto Clear Route The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is stopped.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 259 Auto Center The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected. Scale The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated. Previous View and View Entire Map With the Previous View command. you can return to the previous map view. Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu. unselect the tool. Modify Route With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. because GPS fix was lost in a tunnel. . for example. and the View Entire Map command displays the whole map. View Entire Route By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.

Otherwise the route will appear jagged. Drag and drop the dots into their new positions.260 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The route will be displayed as dots. . Please note that you should maintain the correct order of the dots.

Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode. Layers By selecting the Layers item you will be able to view all the layers of the map in the map side panel. right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 261 When you have finished modifying the route. You can create and save a route plan for later use. Color Legend Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window. To remove or edit individual comments. right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments. To remove all comments. Waypoints The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. Textual Comments With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. .

262 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measure Distance Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two points is used as the radius. The Total distance is displayed in the left-hand panel. . Click the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. Select the points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map.

Full Screen Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. and if you activate any of these items.272). By clicking on the MapX Properties button you will enter the MapX Properties dialog (see p. if you start by activating the side panel. Route Properties When a measurement route is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties. the base station layer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 263 To remove points from the map. Layers and Waypoints items can only be viewed in the side panel. also the side panel will be shown along with the specific item. The Color Legend. Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of the measurement route. click the Measure Distance button. click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. However. Layer Properties The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in the map side panel. you need to select a device in the drop-down menu on the Device page. and the route plan layer. all the three items will be shown in the side panel. . Side Panel When Side Panel is selected. you will be able to view the side panel in the map window. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the devicespecific measurement route layer. You can also access this dialog by doubleclicking on the device-specific route layer in the side-panel. In the case of multi measurements. To hide the Measure Distance panel. the Route Properties dialog appears.

With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line.264 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. If you select the Draw thicker line when using high band option. When the Draw during pause option is deselected. . Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. the route is not drawn during when measurement is in pause. the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. the route will be drawn thicker when the device is using the 1800/1900 band. If the Draw as dots item is selected. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 265 On the Color page you can define route-specific line coloring. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. the system route is not drawn while in GSM. For example. . the default color is not drawn. the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. If you are measuring with a scanner. select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. select the Use color set option. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route. Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. also select the channels/pilots displayed by clicking the Select Channels/Select Pilots button.  Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route. if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values. First. See page 273 for more information on defining color sets. The entire route is drawn with the same color. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected.

You can also define the notification icon size in pixels. .266 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual On the Notifications page select the Show notifications option to view notification icons on the map.

Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option. the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the terminal. you will be able to view textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this feature. the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid. Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Please note that lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. You can select a text and background color for the note in the Text color and Background color fields. Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog. Select a BTS file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel. The Base stations page displays information on the open BTS files on the map. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle. . Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test vehicle. Instead. Select the Show Active Cell Information option to display active base stations along with channel numbers and cell IDs. Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test vehicle. See page 248 for more information. if you only want to draw a line from active system cell(s) to the test vehicle. Define also the line Thickness and Color.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 267 By selecting the Show Textual notes option on the Textual notes page. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and due to this reason. this information is not shown on the map. If missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only. Define also the line Thickness and Color.

General dialog. If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e. in other words. BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. the BTS Properties dialog appears when Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. The other base stations are hidden.. Note that you define a different color for active system base stations and for other base stations.g. The Selected BTS cell color refers to neighbor cells that can be highlighted on the map if neighbor information is defined in a BTS file.268 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual BTS Properties When a base station file is selected in the map side panel. UMTS and GSM). select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active system. The BTS file is selected in the Measurement Properties . Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell. . You can also view the dialog by double-clicking on the BTS file in the map side panel. the system in which the test device is currently. Neighboring cells are highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but also with a bolded outline. You can also select the BTS file through this dialog.

See page 273 for more information on how to edit and create color sets. Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base stations.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 269 Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets. On the Cell info page you can choose what information is displayed from each base station. . and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs.

. The Connected Devices page displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites. In the example below. Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected.270 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information and define the Text color and Background color. all cell information and the Show labels option are selected.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 271 The Cell Range page enables you to view cell range on the map. . Define the degree of cell range transparency in the Cell Range transparency slide bar.

The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line attaching the icons together. To later open the . You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side panel. Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel. and select a file from the list. . select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels. MapX Properties Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions. click the Open Map button.272 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Route Plan Properties When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. the Route Plan Properties dialog appears.gst file.

. or by double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M). double-click on the color set. of Helsinki) on top of that. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list.. Color Set Editor You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties | Color dialog. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 273 If you are using MapInfo® maps. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of the current layers. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. With the Color Set Editor you can define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids. for example. select the layer from the list and click the Remove button. you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. in this case the Route layer is on the top. To add layers on the map click Add. To remove layers from the map.. a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e. and World map is at the bottom. Current Position layer is under that...g. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e. You can also search for a color set by its name.g. To edit an existing color set. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map.

Name and Short name identify the color set. . numerical. The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog.274 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set. In the Range Properties dialog. You can also write a description for the value range. select the color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them. Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. gradient. Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with. or string. You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field. Finally click OK.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 275 Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. Color page.. i. and Active set size in the Color Set field. define the top and bottom values and the step. select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter field. . In the Route Properties | Route dialog. how many values are represented by the same color. the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set. Map Example 1 In the map below. and click OK.e. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the Active set size values. In the Add Range dialog. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values.

the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. Color page. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the TX Power values. In this color set. green means a low TX Power level and red a high level. . In the Measurement's Route Properties dialog. select TX Power in the Parameter and Color Set fields and click OK.276 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 2 In the map below.

and select Properties | Base stations. The Color Legend in the side panel displays the color codes for the EcNo values. or right-click on the measurement layer and select Add BTS File. . and Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) options. In the Layer view in the map side panel.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 277 Map Example 3 In the map below. Click OK. select Ec/N0 (Active) in the Parameter field. the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. On the Color page. click on Add BTS File. Base station icons are displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again. select the Use color set option. Select the Draw line to active base station. and EcN0 in the Color set field.

278 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 4 In the map below. and the route with the black current location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set. Right-click on the first measurement route and select Properties. In addition. and now there should be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. On the Route Properties | Color page. and Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page. and select Properties. You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. Next. In the Layers view click the Add Route button. Click OK. you will see the measurements in the Layers view. Click OK. and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. select the Use color set option. the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map. and MS Power Level in the Color set field. and MS Power Level in the Parameter field. and their color sets in the Color legends view in the map side panel. right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view. In the Route Properties | Color page. . select the Use color set option. The route with the blue current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set. or right-click on the existing measurement layer and select Add Route.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 279 Map Example 5 It is possible to export a map with measurement route. . The Google Earth application needs to be installed for viewing the file.kml file. Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button in the map window. and base station information to Google Earth . colors based on selected parameter. notifications.

Note that you must have Google Earth installed on your laptop to view the file. . Click Save.280 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual A Save As dialog appears. The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map. Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. and type a name for the map to be exported in the File name field. Select a destination for the saved .kml file in the Save in field.

mrk) attached to the measurement file (.nmf). Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. First. To move the markers on the map. right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu. click on Move and select a new destination for the marker. . select a marker in the Markers | Index field. After this. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. It is possible to view selected parameters in indoor map by drag and dropping them in it.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 281 VIEWING FLOORPLANS Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (.

You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists. you can right-click on the map and select Properties which views the properties dialog for the active layer. Multiple Routes and Floorplans You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color.gst file and also as a custom window. If you are running Nemo Outdoor on the Microsoft XP Tablet PC Edition. It is also possible to select a default color or parameter color set for the route in the Color page. a floorplan of the test site. you can switch between the color legends in the Color legends side panel. or click on the Properties button in the Indoor map toolbar. Alternatively. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the side panel to add a route. The Route page enables you to define route line thickness in the Thickness field. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. While you are performing the measurement and walking around in the building. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. The floorplan below has three routes. and go through the steps mentioned above. use the markers to draw the measurement route on the floor plan. In the Notifications page you can choose whether to view notifications on the map. . Map layers can be saved to . click with the Tablet PC pen on the screen and the marker will be placed there. for example. You can make changes to a route by selecting a layer in the Layers view and double-clicking on it to view the layer properties dialog. Click OK to exit the dialog.282 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual On the map you can view. In the Route Properties dialog that appears select a route in the Device drop-down menu.

indoor maps of different floors on the same building at once. This makes it possible for you to have. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu. . you can plan the route in the indoor map window. for example.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 283 You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the Layers view. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. Indoor Route Planning Prior to conducting indoor measurements. A new route plan (. and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar.

284

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor maps. See page 250 for more information.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

285

Indoor Map Popup Menu
Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map.

286

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Custom Window Properties

In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. For example, if you select LTE FDD, the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

Save Custom Window Changes
Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window.

Save as New Custom Window
Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups.

Save as Image
Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image.

Save as MapInfo Tab-File
Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format.

Save as CSV File
Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

287

Move View To
With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 302 for more information on view groups.

Open Map
By selecting the Open Map item, you can open existing map files (.tab).

Save Map
By selecting the Save Map item, you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.

Import Map
You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as maps. Click the Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the popup menu. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly, you must define some map settings. Either define the dimensions in meters of the area visible on the map or define the GPS coordinates of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the map area.

Create Route Plan
The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map window.

288

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Open Route Plan
Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map.

Save Route Plan
The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (.rpf) for later use.

Add Waypoints
Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.

Tool

The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. With the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Arrow selection changes the cursor back to an arrow. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. It cannot be used during playback.

Auto Center
The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

View Entire Map
The View Entire Map command displays the whole map.

View Entire Route
The View Entire Route command displays the whole route.

Textual Comments
With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. To remove or edit individual comments, right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. To remove all comments, right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments.

Show Minimap
With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

289

Show Marker Info
Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file.

Color Legend
Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window.

Show Markers
Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map.

Show Layers
Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel.

Full Screen
Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen. Close the full screen view by clicking on Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.

Route Properties – Indoor Map
In the Route Properties dialog, you can define map-related settings.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map. Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window.

290

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line. If the Draw as dots item is selected, the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. When the Draw during pause option is deselected, the route is not drawn when measurement is paused.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

291

Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. The entire route is drawn with the same color. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values, select the Use color set button. First, select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog. See page 263 for more information on defining color sets. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route, select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected, the default color is not drawn. For example, if the route is colored based Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM, the route is not drawn while in GSM.  Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route, the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.

292

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map. You can define the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field.

The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were. All the ongoing calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. . If you are performing measurements manually. it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. 10. then select Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. 3. Always wait until the end of the call. If the measurement is stopped while the test call is on. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. You can also start a playback of this file. and GPRS detach will be performed. select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of the Nemo Outdoor main window. stopping the measurement is not recommended while a test call is on. Data transfers will be stopped. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement. the measurement process is terminated either by selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. 2.E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 293 ENDING MEASUREMENTS The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main window.  When carrying out measurements using a script. you can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it. At this point. PDP context will be deactivated.  To end the measurements: 1. you can either wait until the script file has been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor. If you are using a script to perform the measurement.

The filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder.  Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard. click Save.294 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MEASUREMENT REPORT The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped. If you do not want this dialog to appear. Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel . Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately. To save the measurement file under another name. click the Rename button and type a new file name in the field that appears. To save the file with the default name. you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button. . To delete the file without saving. click the Delete button.csv file. The dialog displays some statistics from the measurement. or click on the button on the dialog. select the Do not show this dialog again option.

E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 295 Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze. Finally click Upload. In the Analyze Measurement dialog. If you do not select a workbook or a report. the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze.X installed on the same computer where Nemo Outdoor is installed. select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report template that is used for creating a report from the data. .  Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze 5.

Nemo Outdoor will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback when you close the playback file(s).worx) Hardware configurations (. The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time.nmf where the number refers to the device number. with:      Nemo Outdoor Playback functions Nemo tool Nemo Analyze Text editor Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite Finland Ltd. If you answer Yes. Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. for example.tab. The following file types can be opened by dragging and dropping them from Windows Explorer:      Measurements files (.gst) With Windows 7 it is required that Nemo Outdoor is launched with the "Run as Administrator" command. PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed. and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server. depending on whether you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. .hwcx) Maps (. The file name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. You can playback files anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on. .296 Nemo O ut door User M a nual MEASUREMENT RESULTS This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor. Selecting Playback Files When you open a file for playback.1. the file name format should be xxxx.nmf) Workspaces (. If you change the file name manually.

If you have selected a multi measurement. . that is. 39 for more information on how to open measurement files for playback. ending. The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback. During Playback The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The Pause button pauses the playback. and current time. the starting. The Play button starts the playback. The Stop button stops the playback. you can look for a file by clicking the … button.M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 297 To open files for playback. In the dialog. See also p. The same commands can be found in the Playback menu. With the Add Textual Note button you can add written remarks in the measurement file. select File  Open Measurement. you can still clear some of the files from playback. The File Header box displays the measurement file header. This will open up the following dialog. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

and all the other open windows will display the same point of time. The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements. .298 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Viewing and Moving Markers You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during measurements. Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers. select the Play command from the Playback menu or click the Play button on the tool bar. Click on any of the markers in the grid window. After a file has been loaded.

. Select File | Close Measurement. Note that Nemo Outdoor must be in offline mode during the transfer. The new longitude and latitude information is saved in the marker file. If you saved the current device configuration when you started the playback. Closing Playback Files After playback. you need to close the playback file. or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface.M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 299 Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. as otherwise the modem ports required for the FTP transfer will be in use. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load the same device(s). Place the red pin to the new location on the map. You can move the markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button. UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server when a measurement is stopped.

Click on the FTP Options button. Select one or more measurements in the Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog.300 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Select File | Send Measurement to FTP Server. In the FTP Options dialog you can define the FTP Server and Proxy server settings. .

You can also select the Use passive mode option for the transfer.M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 301 Under FTP Server you can define the FTP server address in the Server address field. The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection or via a user-selected dial-up connection. The Username and Password fields will grant you permission to access the server. You can also change this default destination folder to another one in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements. the Proxy address. The Measurement file(s) are sent to the FTP server. and the name of the folder to which the measurement files are sent on the FTP server in the Remote folder field. After configuring the FTP settings. Username and Password fields will become active. and when the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected. the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. When you select the Use a Proxy Server option. . click OK.

Enter a name for the view group and click OK. open a view group. . and select Create New. To rename the default view group.302 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual USER INTERFACE This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in the following sections. If you are not familiar with these standards. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. You will find general descriptions on all the commands and windows. right-click on the tab and select Rename. Maps. To create a new view group. The new view group appears as another tab. refer to your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation. right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups. and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. To organize measurement windows into the view groups. you will have one default view group. The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows® standards. Graphs and open measurement windows there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor. Now you can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab. for example. Then go to another view group by clicking on the respective tab. for example. When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. VIEW GROUPS View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for easier viewing.

The shortcut keys are presented on the menus next to the menu commands. Some commands execute their respective operations immediately. Note that you can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. A command ending in three dots (…) will open a dialog. TOOLBAR You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. you can choose to hide the toolbar. The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks quickly. . this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window. the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function. when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking). See page 330 for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons. just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar. to start the measurement. In the View menu. In the View menu. while others will first display a dialog with options for you to select from. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. STATUS BAR The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending on the operations you are performing. The commands are arranged in menus. this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window.USE R I NT ERF ACE 303 MENU BAR The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. you can select to hide the status bar. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement. For example. For example.

By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option.aex file. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export. the current configuration is saved in a file and opened automatically the next time the program is started.304 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next. File Menu The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations. . The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send measurement files to an FTP server (see p.299). The following items are stored in the . The Work Offline item activates and deactivates the offline mode. Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu.aex file:        Scripts Color sets Custom views Device configurations Notification settings Route plans Workspaces You can also export measurements. With the Export and Import Settings items you can export and import settings into an .

respectively. . Notification Manager. User Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. status indicator. With the Exit command you can close the program. custom window toolbar. Recent Device Configurations. hide and display items of the main window. The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid (see page 239). and device status. The Active View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active window. See page 302 for more information on the view groups. you can select. you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program. View Menu In the View menu. Color Set Editor. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the user. those you wish to see on the screen. Edit Menu In the Edit menu. output. and Recent Measurements items display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files. Through the View Groups item you can create new view groups or switch between existing view groups.USE R I NT ERF ACE 305 The Recent Workspaces. such as the standard toolbar. You can also access the Configuration Manager.

you can make a voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. These same commands can be executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button in the toolbar. The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. In the Script Editor you can edit script files. For example. autodetect and remove devices. This does not affect the measurement file. The Clear Buffers command will empty the event history buffer. Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. . you can control the measurement process and add.306 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Menu Through the Measurement menu.

The following functions can be found in this menu.USE R I NT ERF ACE 307 Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.73). Measurement Properties (p.151) dialogs can be accessed through this menu. you will not need these commands. The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements. if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it.66). Band Lock (page 173) Cell Barring (page 179) Channel Locking (page 169) Handover/Handoff Control (page 174) Missing Neighbor Detection (page 181) Cell Testing (page 180) Timeslot Testing (page 185) . Notification Properties (p. you can reset the Devices window. By selecting the Reset command. If you are using scripts to run measurements. and Script Properties (p. 70). Device Properties (p. for example. General Properties (p.  Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device.58).

315). Markers can be also edited. Pause. it is possible to see the RX level for certain frequencies shown on the side panel. By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window. and Stop commands you can control the playback. Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type. . added or removed via edit marker window. If you select New. Data Menu Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement. The same commands can also be executed by means of toolbar buttons. By right-clicking the Spectrum Graph item you are able to see the static line graph displaying spectrum scanning results. Playback Menu The Playback menu offers you commands for the playback of measurement data. You can also add markers and textual notes in the playback file. Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. You can also access the Open Custom Window dialog (see p.308 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. With the Play.

such as. scrambling code. successes.g. For example. and failures from the measurement. Statistics grids list various statistics. The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet capture files in playback mode. Table grids provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances. Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3. Parameters grids display selected network parameters.). the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e. The Map item opens a map window (see page 246). all measurement events but the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed. the number of PDP context activation attempts. .USE R I NT ERF ACE 309 The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see page 281). Events grids list. system. by default. and LLC messages. etc. carrier.. RLC/MAC.

You can switch the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade. Help Menu The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics.310 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Save as Custom Window… item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows. From the About dialog you can also receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application. With the Close All command you can close all windows at once. you can check the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. The custom windows are presented on page 315. . The Save Changes option saves changes to measurement windows. By selecting the License Information item. Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the program. Tile Horizontally. For example. and Arrange Icons commands. Tile Vertically. Window Menu The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. The active window is marked with a check mark . if you resize the windows. including the contact information and the application version number.

right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and select Customize. type a name for the new toolbar and click OK.USE R I NT ERF ACE 311 CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. to add new menus. . or edit the toolbars. In the New Toolbar dialog. To edit the contents of menus. In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the corresponding options. Click the New button to create a new toolbar.

In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories.312 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Drag commands from the list to a toolbar or menu. . Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the Delete button.

USE R I NT ERF ACE 313 To remove commands from a toolbar or menu. . open the Customize dialog (rightclick on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page. select the toolbar or menu bar you want to restore and click the Reset button. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content. drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or menu.

. you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations. For example. You can also change the icon for each toolbar button.314 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. right-click on a button. Open the Customize dialog. and select Change Button Image.

You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph. The users are also able to make their own custom windows and save them for later use. UMTS.). . Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows for specific types of measuring. GSM. Custom Windows Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. CDMA. You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window dialog (Data | Open Custom Window). indoor view) or by technology (AMPS. map. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid types. bars. Select the custom window you would like to open from the table on the right and click Open. They are also accessible through the parameter tree. grid. Different network parameters and events can be viewed as line graphs. and dots. etc. To make the measuring process easier for first-time users.USE R I NT ERF ACE 315 NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable.

In addition.316 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also save your own custom windows. The Quick Windows bar (go to View. that selected custom window will appear. HSDPA BLER search string matches. Click OK. When you have set up a graph view that you would like to use later on. and select a custom window from the list. HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. Click on one of the quick windows. If you want to remove some custom windows. activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom Window. and select Quick Windows) in Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows.e. parameter short names and possible alias names. for example. Parameter Tree Search Functionality A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters. The next time you click on the same quick window button. select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button. the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i. After clicking OK. the window is added to the custom windows list. .

you can only edit settings that are supported by all the selected devices. if the same APN is used with several devices. It is also possible to select multiple devices (Ctrl+left-click) and define settings that will be applied to all selected devices. double-click the FTP item to access the FTP Transfer Properties dialog.USE R I NT ERF ACE 317 Devices View The Devices view offers easy access to the most common commands and configuration dialogs. By doubleclicking the various items in the view. When you have selected multiple devices. you can select the devices and define the APN for all devices at one go. The view displays all devices connected to Nemo Outdoor and the device-specific commands. . For example. you can access the related configuration dialogs. For example.

69) dialog depending on the device selected. Device script settings button opens the Measurement Properties . . select the data protocol (FTP.318 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Selected Data Protocol field. 59) for the selected device. SMS/MMS message sending. GPRS attach/detach. The selection is device-specific. such as. Measurement settings button offers access to configuration and properties dialogs. Device measurement settings button opens the Measurement Properties . Group devices by type/server button organizes the devices in the view.Notifications page (p.Measurement Settings page (p.) used in the measurements.Script page (p. Measurement control button offers access to some commands that are supported by the selected device. 33) where you can connect to Nemo Invex servers. 66). 101) for the selected device. start/stop voice call. 68) or GPS Properties (p. Add or remove devices button opens a menu where you can choose to add a new device or remove the selected device. Note that this button is activated only if your Nemo Outdoor license includes the Nemo Invex option. etc. Device connection settings button opens the Phone Properties (p. SMTP. Scanner Properties (p. TCP/UDP. Measurement servers button opens the Measurement Servers dialog (p. 73) for the selected device. Device notification settings button opens the Measurement Properties .

USE R I NT ERF ACE 319 Device Status View The Device Status view displays the device status. . The green light at the upper left corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected.

Drag and drop the devices in the correct order and finally click OK. .320 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Right-click on the Device Status view and select Toggle Status Window Docking Area to dock the Status view to the top of the main view. Right-click on the Device Status view and select Reorder Devices to change the order of the devices in the Device Status and Devices views.

The minimizing. The active window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows® Control Panel to indicate an active window (see your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation). Cascade Windows The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. For example. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. Script Status Window  Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners. the speech bubble indicates a normal message. You can bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that window (except for the Minimize. Icons ( ) next to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. maximizing. the orange flag a warning.USE R I NT ERF ACE 321 Output Window The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. this window is also not available when making scanner measurements. From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current measurement. and Close buttons in the top right corner). Controlling Windows You can have several windows open at the same time. and closing functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. and the exclamation mark a notification. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup menu. . You can also bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top left corner of the window). Maximize. the red flag an error message. You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main window.

Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. . If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed. E. starting from the left side. the second click will remove the mark. activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu. Close All The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the Nemo Outdoor main window. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port. To do this. four percentage of the time during the sample duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits. it can be seen from the HSDPA link adaptation information table grid. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample duration which is set to 200ms. in the example below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. filling the whole space so that all windows are visible at the same time. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red. Saving Window Settings If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor.g. The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically. Clicking the command will result on a check mark . E.. select the Arrange Icons command in the Window menu. Arrange Icons The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the main window.322 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Tile Windows The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side.g. HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW In the bar below. graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports.

USE R I NT ERF ACE 323 .

  . average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity. server or transmission problems. keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers.324 Nemo O ut door User M a nual TROUBLESHOOTING This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. Does not work manually. Try another FTP server for comparison. Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. For Nemo Outdoor 5. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. script is always needed. Also try different servers. in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. LOW THROUGHPUT In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications. PRB affects throughput directly. Other things that could help troubleshooting:    Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. Command prompt FTP throughput. typically 10-20%. observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell. For Nemo Outdoor 5. a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. Works also manually. For better results. In LTE networks. In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. For example.

Using Nemo Outdoor: 1.): 1. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed. Window size not set.nmf) does not save window size info. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Window shows the current value. . Using debug logs (for developers. etc.    TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 325 All Windows Versions  How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: 1. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. TCP Auto-Tuning detected. help desk. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used. Set to default.pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window. 12. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0: 11. Look at the Tcp tree. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function. A measurement file (. Check the . 2.

the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software.  Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings. If TCP auto-tuning is disabled. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Windows Vista/Windows7 Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Outdoor 5. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software. Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. 4. They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. In most cases. However. If the registry value is missing. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global” 3. Right-click and select Run as administrator. if the same registry value that XP uses is set. . This registry entry can be removed. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB.326 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Windows XP Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. 2. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists.  How to check TCP auto-tuning state: 1. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.40 and later checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled.

It enables receive window values of over 16 MB. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:      disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 327 5. Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled. Limits to 64 KB (65535). To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. restricted: Recommended. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. . Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended. very conservatively. it can degrade performance in common scenarios. only intended for research purposes). However. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value. normal: Default value. highlyrestricted: Recommended. 6. 7. type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”.

Connect the device. CANNOT ADD DEVICES If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo Outdoor. Please. check that recording is not on. .328 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual DEVICE STATUS VIEW The Device Status view displays the device status. see page 13 for more information on copy protection. it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is functioning normally. If the copy protection dongle is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated. If a red light is blinking. your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. If a green light is blinking. it means that the device has been disconnected. Also. playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement). rightclick on the device in the Devices view and select Reset.

the mouse stops working correctly. Double-click on Mice and other pointing devices. . The last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information. The mouse device is now disabled and the GPS device can be reconnected. 2. 5. Double-click on System. A Microsoft Serial BallPoint device should appear. 1. Right click on the Microsoft Serial BallPoint device and select Disable from the popup menu."0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0" Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 329 CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS If the commands are inactive in the Measurement control menu .1. MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the measurement is stopped. In this case.262. Go to the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button. check that you have devices online. 3. PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS The Windows® XP and Vista operating systems sometimes confuse a GPS receiver with the computer’s mouse.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5. The Work offline or online button should be unselected. However. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel. When this occurs.14:46:49. 6.50 or later. 4. The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where modification is detected. measurement files are still opened normally. #HASH. follow the steps below. Confirm the disabling by clicking Yes in the message box. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback.

jpg). Title Open Playback File(s) Button Description Opens an existing measurement for playback Opens an existing workspace file. Saves the active window as an image file (. Nemo Outdoor starts writing a file of the current measurement. Saves the current workspace configuration. Opens the Configuration Manager dialog. Opens the Open Custom Window dialog. Pauses the playback/recording.330 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Stops the playback/recording. Adds a textual note in the measurement file. Saves the active window as a new custom window. Adds a marker in the measurement file or on the Indoor map. Switches the offline mode on and off. Open Workspace Save Workspace Configuration Manager Work Offline Start Recording Start Playback Pause Stop Start/Stop Scripts Add Marker Add Textual Note Open Custom Window Save As New Custom Window Save Changes to Custom Window Save As Image . Saves changes to the active custom window. Switches a script on/off. Starts the playback with the selected files.

NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 331 DIALOG BUTTONS These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor. Adds a new device. Updates information in the Configuration Manager. event trigger. or script from the Configuration Manager. Through the Device Commands button you have access to various mobile specific functions. event trigger. Device Commands Device Settings Autodetect Devices Refresh Properties Add Remove . Removes the selected device. Offers access to several dialogs. Opens the Notifications dialog where you can select the events of which Nemo Outdoor will display or play a notification. or script depending on the item selected in the Configuration Manager. Title Expand Device Info Window Device notification settings Button Description Displays the selected device info parameters in the Device Info window. Opens a Properties dialog for the selected item in the Configuration Manager. Automatically detects devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

332 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs. Opens the Layer Properties dialog where you can edit an existing layer. Title Hide Layer Button Description Hides the selected layer in the graph Remove Layer Removes the selected layer New Layer Opens the New Layer dialog where you can configure a new layer to be added in the active graph. Displays the info panel with numerical values on the right side of the graph. in separate graphs. Layer Properties Move Layer Down Move Layer Up Set Stacked Mode Autoscroll Show Panels . When the button is pressed down. the graph is scrolling automatically as the measurement proceeds. that is. Moves the selected layer down in the layer view Moves the selected layer up in the layer view If there are two or more layers in a graph. you can view them in stacked mode.

which you can use for dragging the map to a different position.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 333 MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps. Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing bitmap images as floorplans. Changes the cursor into an arrow. Save Map Import Map Layer Properties Find Map at Position Create Route Plan Open Route Plan Save Route Plan Add Waypoint Arrow Pan Center . Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you can configure the layer properties. Changes the cursor into the center tool. Keep the left mouse button pressed down and move the map. Place the hand on the map. With the automatic map find feature the user can easily locate all maps from same location. Saves the current map layers and settings into a MapInfo Geoset file (. Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually.rpf). Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File (. Through this item you can open saved route plans. Available only in the Indoor map. Creates a route plan from an open measurement. Changes the cursor into a hand.gst). Title Open Map Button Description Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file. which you can use for selecting a point on the map on which the map view will be centered. which you can use for selecting items.

the map view will always center on the test vehicle. It cannot be used during playback. The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto Center tool. With the Auto Center tool activated. It cannot be used during playback. Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in the map window. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. which you can use for zooming in on the map. With the Entire Route button you can view the whole route on the map. The higher the percentage. for example. Zoom Out Clear Route Set Current Location Auto Center Auto Center Sensitivity Previous View Entire Map Entire Route Scale Bar Measure Distance .334 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Zoom In Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass. if you have moved the map with the Pan tool. This requires that a GPS receiver is used. That this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map after zooming in. the sooner the map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves around on the route. which you can use for zooming out on the map. This button is active only during measurements. With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the distance on the map in kilometers between multiple points. Click the Previous View button to return to the previous map view. Clears the measurement route from the map. Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass.

.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 335 Side Panel Activate the Side Panel button to view the side panel in the map window.

This window can be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.336 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SHORTCUT KEYS This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor. .

Attach Attempt Attach Failed Attach Success MMS Receiving Attempt MMS Receiving Failed MMS Receiving Success MMS Sending Attempt Call Alerting Call Answered Call Attempt Call Connected Call Disconnect Call Dropped Call Failed Call Received Packet Call Attempt Packet Call Connected Packet Call Disconnected Packet Call Failed Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA Packet Technology Changed to UMTS Cell Change Attempt Cell Change Failed Cell Change Success Cell Reselection Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM RX Level Low/Bad Routing Area Update Attempt Routing Area Update Failed Context Activation Attempt Context Activation Failed Context Activation Success Context Deactivation Semiduplex Call Attempt Service Lost Routing Area Update Success PTT Idle PTT Receiving PTT Transmitting MMS Sending Failed MMS Sending Success .NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS 337 NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS Below are described the default notification symbols.

338 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Service Received Data Call Attempt Data Connection Attempt Data Connection Failed Data Connection Success Data Disconnect Data Transfer Attempt Data Transfer Success Data Transfer Failed Soft Handover Failure Soft Handover Success SMS Received SMS Receiving Attempt SMS Receiving Failed SMS Sending Completed Dead Reckoning in Use Detach Differential GPS in Use Duplex Call Attempt FER High TX Power High/UL Power Up High Video Call Attempt Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt (ETSI) Voice Call Connected (ETSI) Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI) GPS Fix Lost GPS Fix Received HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed Voice Call Dropped (ETSI) Star Thumb Down Handover Attempt Handover Failed Handover Success Thumb Up Location Area Update Attempt Location Area Update Failed Location Area Update Success .

NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS 339 Marker Markov Call Attempt Measurement Error .

AND FAX SUPPORT During the warranty period. you will receive a personal access key and password by email in a few days time.helpdesk@anite. please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Support Agreement.anite. EMAIL. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements.com.Helpdesk@anite. and it is available to you seven days a week. but you are without access to the user club. If you have questions relating to the Nemo User Club. Once you are registered with our User Club. USER CLUB The Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. the phone and fax support related to potential software errors is free of additional charge. PHONE.340 Nemo O ut door User M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo Outdoor. . When faxing or emailing. Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement. INTERNET SUPPORT At our web site http://www.com/nemo. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support.com/nemo. you can find all the frequently asked questions about Nemo Outdoor. among other information. After submitting the requested information. please complete an on-line registration form. please e-mail us at nemo.com or call +358 50 395 7800. 24 hours a day. you will automatically receive e-mails informing you each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast. You can find it at our WWW site http://www. Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements or partner agreements. please contact our Nemo Outdoor technical support service at Nemo.anite. easy.

see Windows® Control Panel | System  Your computer brand model (e. State Hwy 161 Suite 425 Irving. China Email Tel. Garmin GPS II Plus)  Your Nemo Outdoor version and build (e.g. TX 75038 USA APAC Email Tel.com +358 50 395 7800 +358 8 551 6182 Anite Finland Ltd Kiviharjunlenkki 1 D 90220 Oulu Finland Americas Email Mobile Fax Address nemo.helpdesk@anite. Ltd. 101 Thomson Road..g. #20-05 United Square Singapore 307591 P. Windows® XP).. Beijing 100022 China When contacting us for problem reporting. Lenovo)  Your test mobile types (e. 21st Floor The Exchange Beijing.helpdesk@anite.. see Help | About  Device handler versions  Your description of the problem  Whether you were able to repeat the problem  The corresponding measurement results file (as email attachment or on disc) . Yi 118. Fax Address nemo. please supply/inform us of:  Your Windows® version number (e.R.g. Fax Address nemo. Nokia 6720)  GPS receiver type (e.com +86 10 6567 8528 +86 10 6567 8521 Anite Wireless Trading (Beijing) Limited. Jianguo Road Chaoyang District.com +65 9746 2431 +65 6254 9885 Anite Singapore Pte.g. Fax Address nemo.com +1 469 951 9105 +1 469 774 4608 (En español e português) +1 972 462 1640 Anite Inc. Room 2109..x). No.. Version 5.helpdeskt@anite.g. 6225 N.NEM O O UTDO O R S UP PO RT 341 Please contact us at the following locations: Global Email Tel.xx.helpdesk@anite.

2. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot.  To install a PCMCIA serial I/O card: 1. see the setup guide included in the converter product package. If you are using a USB serial converter. select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). 3. If possible. always use the fixed COM ports of your computer to connect the test devices. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests.342 Nemo O ut door User M a nual APPENDIX 1 INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD This appendix describes how to install a PCMCIA serial I/O card to create additional COM ports for your computer. 4. the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware.  Use the COM ports created with the PCMCIA serial card for GPS receivers and/or scanners. When the update is complete or if you have installed the I/O drivers earlier. You should now be able to see the installed driver and the COM port it is using. . Restart your computer. If you have not installed the I/O drivers. The COM port number is important. as you need to define it in the Nemo Outdoor configuration settings.

. dual.APPE NDI X 2 343 APPENDIX 2 You can have three kinds of Socket cards: single. you can check the COM ports from My Computer | Control Panel. After you have installed the dual socket card drivers. and Quad.

The First Port Name and Second Port Name display the COM ports used by the socket card (in this example COM3 and COM6. respectively). plug the GPS receiver in to the PCMCIA card cable. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot. You should now be able to see the installed driver and also the COM port it is using.344 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By double-clicking on the Socket Dual I/O icon the Socket Dual I/O Properties dialog is opened. If you have not installed the socket I/O drivers. After restarting. The ports can be used for connecting the GPS receiver and the Scanner. 5. CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET This appendix describes how to connect the GPS receiver to the computer when using PCMCIA socket. 4. Start Nemo Outdoor. do it at this point. 3. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. When the update is complete or if you have installed the socket I/O drivers earlier. 2. .  To connect the GPS receiver to the computer’s PCMCIA socket: 1. Open the Configuration Manager dialog and detect the GPS receiver either manually or using the Autodetect function. If you need to restart your computer. select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA).

If you do not know the right projection. . .filename. and .filename. or a shade of gray. photographs. we recommend using gray scale images.GIF. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file. Start the MapInfo® software. MapInfo® supports 256 colors. 2. MapInfo® can read the following types of raster images: . It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster map image.JPG formats. . . Select your raster map image file (.filename.TIF.TIF .PCX . Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze. The Image Registration Dialog is displayed. you can bring paper maps. Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support .APPE NDI X 3 345 APPENDIX 3 MAKING MAPINFO® RASTER MAPS Using raster image files. Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image.JPG .  To register a raster map: 1.JPG) and open it. then you must register the raster map image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you create in MapInfo®.BIL Color options are: Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white.GIF. such as street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map. and other graphic images into MapInfo®. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. white. You do this in the Image Registration Dialog. the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.GIF . Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black. By doing this. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map.TIF.filename.filename.filename. you can display it in a map window.BMP . the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map images.

5 degrees. enter coordinates in meters. click OK in the Image Registration dialog. 7.346 Nemo O ut door User M a nual 3. or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees 4. Add Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. The Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels.tab and filename. Open filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. if you are registering a UTM map image. 30 minutes. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map). specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. 6. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. Using the MapBasic® program.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. enter 65. to specify the coordinates 65 degrees. If you want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates. you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format. The raster map will be displayed in the map window. Start adding control points. 5. After all control points have been defined. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. For example. You must choose at least three control points. Move filename. For example. Select points that can be easily identified and selected in the map window. .

A known SPC can also be overwritten by this plugin. Directory number defines a phone number . In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items.APPE NDI X 5 347 APPENDIX 4 CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device Settings . You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings.

. On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features. You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile. This can be used to load any previously saved PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile.348 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal MIN2 defines a three-digit area code SPC defines the service programming code IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2 On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items.

1. Install the suite when launched. 2. Click on the prltools.asp link to get to the downloads page. The download page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using the search tool on the main page. This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel. you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from CDG. From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it.APPE NDI X 5 349 Should you need to manually edit a PRL. .org.

9. and click Next. 5. open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO.exe file. 4. Click Next to confirm installation. Click Install in the dialog that appears. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog. Run the Setup. 8.350 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. It should look as follows in Excel: . Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog. Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears. 6. Click Next in the Welcome window. 7. Next.

The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop. scanners. Nemo Outdoor Multi can be delivered with or without the carrying case. These two options are elaborated on below. preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator.APPE NDI X 5 351 APPENDIX 5 NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION  Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional ruggedized rollaround carrying case. . All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a car’s +12VDC power output. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. and the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers simultaneously while connected to a single laptop. and a GPS device. The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on different system technologies and networks with support for up to seven test devices such as mobiles. With the high-quality Neutrik USB connectors and the professional lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use.

. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered without the case. test terminals The mobile holder panel is by default attached to the lid of the multi carrying case. for example. all of the common components listed below will be included. Common Components Carrying case Mobile holder panel. on the car back seat. but can also be semi-permanently mounted into a test vehicle. With the carrying case option. only some of the common components will be included in the package.352 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Nemo Outdoor Multi comes in two options: with or without the case.

see page 360. .APPE NDI X 5 353 MMAC3 unit The MMAC3 unit is placed on the bottom layer of the carrying case. In the latter instance. or it can also be used without the carrying case. Mounting plate The MMAC3 unit is attached to the mounting plate and placed either in the multi carrying case or alternatively can be attached to a location in the test vehicle.

The inverter should be connected directly to the car battery. The inverter converts +12V into +110V or +220V depending on the requirements of the market area.354 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Mascot 12V Pure Sine Wave Inverter The inverter provides power for the laptop on which Nemo Outdoor is running. or it may overheat! . The operating voltage of the inverter is a constant +12V. or alternatively for an Anritsu scanner or for any other device which uses the 110 or 220 voltage.  Note that the inverter should be taken out of the carrying case when in use.

12 ft) Function: is used to connect the MMAC3 unit to the car 12V socket when you want to use the MMAC3 without the carrying case.4).APPE NDI X 5 355 Power cables Nemo Outdoor Multi comes with four external power cables. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector. 1046-C-025 1041-C-040 Length: 5m (16. and one cable for fixed installation in the test vehicle. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector. Both the carrying case and the MMAC3 unit have one cable to attach the unit to the car 12V socket. Product code Cable External power cable description Length: 4m (13.40 ft) Function: used when multi carrying case unit is used for fixed installation in a test vehicle. If the MMAC3 unit is placed in the carrying case. 1041-C-038 Length: 4m (13. The MMAC3 cables are only needed if you want to mount the MMAC3 unit into the car instead of keeping it in the carrying case. Two of the cables (1. . it is directly connected to the connector panel of the multi carrying case.2) are meant for the Multi carrying case and two for the MMAC3 unit (3.12 ft) Function: Enables the Multi carrying case to be connected to the car 12V socket.

. The laptop is connected to the sine wave power inverter. If the scanner has been delivered with the carrying case. The car 12V socket provides a constant +12V.356 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 1041-C-039 Length: 4m (13.12 ft) Function: You can use this external power cable for the MMAC3 unit for fixed installation in a car in instances when you want to use the MMAC3 unit without its carrying case. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for more details. Laptop The Nemo Outdoor Multi system runs on a single laptop with Nemo Outdoor installed on it. and connected to the MMAC3 USB port. it will come mounted into the case. Optional components Scanner It is possible to use one PCTEL EX or PCTEL EX mini scanner at a time with Nemo Outdoor Multi. The power inverter converts 12V to 110V or 220V depending on the requirements of the market area.

The MMAC3 carrying case consists of three main parts: lid. please refer to the Voice Quality guide for further instructions. The optional components remain optional. and a middle panel divides the case into two parts. top level and bottom level. the mobile holder panel is covered with soft padding which has openings for the test terminals. the mobile holder panel can alternatively also be removed from the lid and semi-mounted. External antennas The external antennas can be placed on the middle panel which has a special magnet board to keep them in their place. and grooves on the inside leading the cables into the case and to the MMAC3 unit. . Lid The case lid holds the mobile holder panel. When attached to the lid. for example. The test terminals are mounted onto the terminal holder panel. onto the test vehicle back seat. all of the common components mentioned above are included.APPE NDI X 5 357 USB Soundcard for Voice Quality measurements If you have purchased a TerraTec USB sound card with your Nemo Outdoor Multi. However. so not part of the default package. it is possible to use external antennas. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered with the carrying case option. MMAC3 WITH CASE When Nemo Outdoor Multi is purchased with the carrying case.

The MMAC3 unit with the test terminals and other devices connected to it are connected to the MMAC3 USB connector’s other end underneath the connector box. Both the MAIN POWER and MMAC3 POWER switches must be turned on when the Multi system is in use. The USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors are meant for external devices such as the GPS devices. MMAC3 unit uses its internal back-up battery. Please remember to connect the data cable to same USB port in the laptop after its initial installation. Connector Box  The MMAC3 POWER switch turns on the MMAC3 unit. If only MMAC3 POWER switch is turned on. However it makes it possible to measure up to approximately 45-60 minutes without external power supply. the optional scanner or optional USB soundcard for Voice Quality measurements. The MMAC3 USB connector is connected to the laptop USB port with a USB data cable. depending on whether it is to be connected to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. The MAIN POWER switch turns on the Multi system when it is connected to either the car +12V socket or the car battery. This way the MMAC3 unit with its devices are connected to the car power source and with the laptop PWR CONNECTOR is meant for the Nemo Outdoor Multi main external power cable.  Note that the lid must always be open when performing measurements. or otherwise the system may overheat. The switch also provides power for the optional scanner. The Nemo Outdoor application supports up to five test mobiles at the time of printing this manual. Most of the time it is recommended that both the MMAC3 POWER and the MAIN POWER switches are turned on when the Multi system is in used.     . There are two cables available in the system. The back-up battery is intended for short power failures.358 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The mobile holder panel can support up to six test terminals which can be secured in place with the help of Velcro tapes.

Bottom level Below the middle panel you will find the following items: 1) MMAC3 unit 2) Optional USB soundcard for voice quality measurements 3) Optional scanner 4) Test terminal car chargers 5) Lockable USB bushings for the test terminal data cables Top level The top level holds the following items: 1) Mascot DC to AC 12V pure Sine Wave Inverter for the laptop 2) Magnet board for external antennas. 3) Straps for holding cables in place during the transportation of the carrying case. The straps can be tightened.APPE NDI X 5 359 Carrying case The Multi measurement system comes divided into two levels by a middle panel. .

360

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

4) You can lift the middle panel by the handles on the left- and right- hand sides of the carrying case.  Note that you should use separate cigarette lighter sockets in the car for the MMAC3 multi unit and for the laptop, otherwise the car fuse risks burning.

MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE

The MMAC3 unit can also be delivered on its own, without the case. In this case the components included in the package are as follows.

MMAC3 unit

The MMAC3 unit is placed on the mounting plate. See below.

APPE NDI X 5

361

Mounting plate

Belt

The belt holds the MMAC3 unit in its place on the mounting plate.  Note that the belt is no longer included in the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi package.

USB A to USB B data cable

362

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

External power cable

Screws

USB bushing

APPE NDI X 5

363

Mobile holder panel

Item 1. MMAC3 unit 2. Mounting plate 3. Belt 4. USB-A to USB-B cable 3 m 5. External power cable 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16 7. Hex Nut DIN 985 M4 8. Screw DIN 7981C 4.2x16 9. USB bushing 10. Mobile holder panel

Code MMAC3 1041-P-00 1041-P-01 1041-C-038 1041-P-033 800-0324-818

364

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION
Without Carrying Case
The graph below shows the different components of the MMAC3 system.

Compiling the MMAC3 system
1. Attach the screws (see above, 6. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16) in the holes shown below. This enables you to attach the MMAC3 unit on a surface in the test vehicle.

APPE NDI X 5

365

13. Place the MMAC3 box into the mounting plate.

14. The MMAC3 unit is now ready to be used once all the cables and test devices have been attached to it.

366

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

With Carrying Case
 Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use, otherwise it may risk overheating! Below you will see the system in a graph.

APPE NDI X 5

367

Compiling the MMAC3 system
1. Open the case locks. There are a total of six locks on three sides of the carrying case. Lift the clasp and turn it to open the case.

15. Connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to a power source in the car. There are two ways of connecting the Multi system to a power source in the car: either to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. These two options are listed below. a) Non-fixed installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to the car 12V socket using the external power cable with the code 1046-C-025 (see cable 1 on p. 355.). Connect the plug of the power cable to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the plug until it locks to place. Next, connect the cigarette lighter end of the cable to the car 12V socket. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it out.

368

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

b) Fixed Installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system directly to the vehicle battery. Connect the cable plug (code 1041-C-040) to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, and push and turn the grey part of the cable until it locks to place. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box, lift and turn the plug until it is released and you can pull it out. Attach the other end of the cable to the car battery.

16. Connect the possible optional USB devices such as GPS, second scanner etc to the USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors. 17. The GPS antennas are placed on the vehicle roof in order to maximize the RF qualities of the antenna. The middle panel contains an iron board which is meant for the antennas. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the roof corners and roof windows, and two wavelengths from each other. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz 800 MHz 900 MHz  = 66 cm (25.98”)  = 37 cm (14.56”)  = 33 cm (12. 99”)

1800 MHz  = 17 cm (6.69”) 1900 MHz  = 16 cm (6.29”) 2100 MHz  = 14,5 cm (5.7”) GPS antenna 1565- 1575 MHz  = 19 cm (7.48”)

With a GPS antenna, distance from the corner is not important. However, especially within the following frequency range 1800- 1900 MHz, the mobile antennas can interfere with the GPS receiver.

Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. in which event the antennas are attached directly to the test terminals. it means that the device is off. It is possible to use external antennae with the carrying case. Be careful not to pinch the cables with metal parts in any way that would damage them.    Green light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. Turn on the Multi system.  . Place the middle panel back in the carrying case. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the internal back up battery power source. The MMAC3 Power switch provides power solely for the MMAC3 unit. 19. or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty. Connect the power cable that came with it directly to the car battery.APPE NDI X 5 369 Place all antenna away from roof racks or any other obstructions. When the light is off. 18. Bring the cables from the antennas into the vehicle. Take the Mascot DC to AC power inverter out of the carrying case and place it on a steady surface in the vehicle. The Main PWR switch provides power for the whole system when the system is connected to the vehicle. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case.

Attach one end of the data cable to a port in the laptop and the other to the MMAC USB port. If the system was purchased without a laptop it is recommended to install all required drivers for all test devices. Connect the test terminals to the MMAC3 box and to the laptop. 23. Connect the test terminals to the USB connectors in the MMAC3 unit one by one. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware. 22. Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further instructions on how to connect each phone to the computer (via the MMAC3 unit) and on how to set up a dial-up connection and add the device to Nemo Outdoor on the laptop. 21. Connect the PC to the MMAC3 USB connector using the B data cable. Once installation with the first terminal is done proceed with next one until all terminals and test devices are installed. Windows will automatically recognize the device. Check that each phone has a SIM card in it and that the battery is in place. it is a lot easier to handle the installation process one terminal at a time. When tightening the screw the USB cable with the bushing is locked in place to the MMAC3 unit. The bushing is closed with screws. See the phone’s manual for further instructions on how to do this. Each phone’s USB cable is secured in a bushing which keeps the data cable securely in place. install also the driver that comes with the scanner before connecting the USB data cable to the laptop. and the USB cable inserted in the USB connector in the MMAC3 unit. If the optional scanner is included and reassembled inside the carrying case. where you should be able to see the Generic USB Hub under Universal Serial Bus controllers. Especially when the installation process is done for the first time. All drivers can be found on the CD that comes with the delivery. .370 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 20.

install the top part of the USB bushing to the USB port and if needed use a bit of force to press it together with the lower part. After that. it can be used for other USB devices as well. The MMAC3 unit has six USB A connectors at the front for terminals. for example. Next. pull out the data cable from the USB port. the GPS device and the optional scanner. Pull out the screw and pull out the top part of USB bushing. However. 3. If you have purchased an optional scanner. On the back side there are two USB connectors: one USB B connector which is already connected to the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel. pull out the lower part of the USB bushing and store the parts to a secure place for future use. to the laptop. Unscrew the Torx screw. Next. Use a torx screw to tighten and lock the data cable to the MMAC3 unit.APPE NDI X 5 371  Removing data cable with USB bushing from MMAC3 1.  Installing data cable with USB bushing to MMAC3 1. not for scanners! If a scanner is connected with the socket. and press the data cable from the top so that the data cable fits inside the lower part of the USB bushing as shown in the picture above. The MMAC3 unit is connected to the laptop through the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel. Install the lower part of the USB bushing to the USB port. 2. please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for instructions on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor. 5. Plug in the USB data cable to a USB port in the MMAC3 unit. . 4. Please tighten the screw as tight as possible till the connection is secure.  Note that these power sockets are meant solely for test terminal use. Nemo Outdoor Multi is now ready to be used for measurements. the fuse risks overheating. 2. The optional soundcard can be connected. and the other which is a USB A connector meant primarily for the optional scanner. See the Nemo Voice Quality Guide for further instructions on how to set up the voice quality system.

saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system. the system in combination with the Nemo Outdoor Multi -option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls.0 compliant B port (In) Seven USB 2.0. bump and shock) vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC. The system is connected to a single laptop. Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications  Interfaces     One USB 2. it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/USB modems. In addition. a scanner and a sound card. The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor.0 compliant ports (Out) Main Power Switch/LED Neutrik +12V Lockable Power Connector (NL2MP)  Complies with the following standards   300 019-2-5 V3.0 class T5.372 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 6 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL  Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop.1 standard (random. ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III . voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously.

85 No devices No devices TerraTec Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via USB port 2 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 3 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 4 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5 Nokia terminals charged 0.7 USB data cable must be connected to PC.2 Charging phone via USB x 3 3.8A/socket or total 5A Back-up battery capacity: Li-ion 2500 mAh Operating mode Required power (A) 0.65 Charging phone x 5 5.7 2.2 Not charging Charging Minimum operating voltage +10.25 Charging phone x 6 5.APPE NDI X 6 373    IP Rated: IP67 EN60529:1991 IEC60529:1989   Lockable USB data cable connections Automatic Pressure Equalization Valve Power Specification    Input: +12VDC nominal (11. max 8A Outputs: +12VDC: 0.15VDC range).2 4.2 2.45 Charging phone x 3 4. Otherwise USB charging does not work Charging phone via USB x 2 3.35 1.7 Charging phone via USB x 4 Charging phone via USB x 5 4.85 Note Input Voltage +12V DC Minimum operating voltage +11.3V DC Configuration No devices No devices TerraTec Charging phone x 1 Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via car charger 2 Nokia terminals charged via car charger 3 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 4 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 5 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 6 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers Not charging Charging Charging phone x 2 3.3 .3V DC measured) Charging phone via USB x 1 2.35 1.05 Charging phone x 4 4.7 2.7 .8V DC (11.

00GHz or higher 512MB RAM minimum. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals. 1GB RAM recommended 100MB of free hard disk space for installation and use. the power should always be turned on first in the Multi unit.g. 1GB recommended For up to four channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. if a +12V cigarette lighter socket is used as power source).. and only after that on the PC (e.2 Measurement time with back up battery with sound card and six terminals ~3.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. Measurement time with back up battery without sound card with six terminals ~20 minutes  Note that if the same power source is shared with Multi Lite and the PC.bit) or Windows® Vista (32 bit) For multi data and voice quality measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.5 minutes “Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals “Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI.374 Nemo O ut door User M a nual via USB ports Charging phone via USB x 6 6 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5. Computer Requirements       PC (IBM or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP Professional (32 .26GHz or higher required .

9 x 32.1 cm .APPE NDI X 6 375 Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components Case Pelican case 1520  Interior 45.7 x 17.

2 x 40 x 18.41")  Weight ~ 10. 3m). 4 pcs Movable holders with hinge.3kg (22. Gas spring Middle part     Place for up to six terminals Fixed holders.78" x 15. USB extension cable (max.72")  Exterior 50. dongle.7lbs) (without test terminals and antennas) Lid organizer   Place for CD.8 cm (19.06" x 12.376 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual (18. 2pcs Fan . antennas. etc.77" x 7.89" x 6.

APPE NDI X 6 377 Bottom part      2500mAh back-up battery PCB/Charger Cigarette lighter sockets Industrial seven port USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card (optional) .

4 onwards. .378 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Exterior  Carbine hooks (2pcs) Optional components   Scanner Sound card Laptop with Nemo Outdoor  Note that from version 5. Nemo Outdoor requires a new dongle which cannot be used with any previous versions of Nemo Outdoor.

Next. so there is no need for you to access the bottom part of the case. only focus on driver installation. 3m long) to the laptop. Connect the Multi Lite power cable to the power connector next to the power switch on the connector panel. lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released. . make sure that the drivers for the terminal data cables. However.   Note that you should make sure that the PC meets the computer requirements mentioned above. and pull it up. Similarly. 6. you will need to set up and connect your test devices with Nemo Outdoor. 5. Attach the test terminals to their mobile holders one by one. Connect the USB extension cable to the USB data cable coming from USB hub. The dial-up installation will be performed later on. This means that the data and audio cables as well as the optional sound card have been set up for you. Insert the copy protection dongle attached to the case lid organizer to your computer. At this point.APPE NDI X 6 379 Setting Up the System  Multi Lite first-time installation Upon your purchase of the Multi Lite case and test devices. 1. you will receive the system semiconfigured. turn on the PC and run the Nemo Outdoor installation CD. In the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide you will find terminal-specific instructions regarding the drivers. 2. when you want to remove the cable connector from the connector panel. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector. push and turn it to the left until it locks to place. Even though the Multi unit can derive power from the laptop. Refer to the separate Nemo Scanner Guide and to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide documents for instructions. Switch on the Multi unit from the connector panel. The following instructions will guide you through this process. Note that prior to connecting the test devices to the PC. Connect the other end of the cable to the car +12V socket. sound card and scanners have been installed. it is not powerful enough for uninterrupted power supply. 7. 4. Open the case latches. 3. 8. and the other end to the PC (max.

and so forth. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements. Note also that some terminals are charged via a USB port.380 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   Note that with Nokia N85. N97US. For example. and 6720US terminals. . 11. N97. Start Nemo Outdoor on the PC. N96. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements.  10. Holders 1-4 are reserved for Voice Quality measurements. Connect the data cables to the test terminals one by one. the voice quality cable for terminal 1 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 1. N96US. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. 12. Instructions for how to add the device in Nemo Outdoor is included in the dial-up instructions. See page 436 for more information. 9. The layout of the mobile holder configuration is as shown in the image below. N85US. and the other end to the +12V power sockets in the Nemo Multi Lite connector panel. 6720. Note that the same terminal type can use the same dial-up connection with Nemo Outdoor. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. and follow the dial-up connection instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Connect the chargers to the test terminals. the voice quality cable for terminal 2 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 2. after initial connection to a USB port.

There are four screws (DIN 912 hex head screws) in the middle panel. not to the USB 2. Disconnect the terminals from the laptop and remove the data cables from the terminals by pulling them out.APPE NDI X 6 381  Note that only phones can be connected to the cigarette lighter sockets in the Multi Lite panel. and one screw (DIN 912 hex head screw) on either side of the case for attaching mobile holders. the fuse risks overheating! 13. If you purchased a scanner. otherwise it may risk overheating! 14. In case you change your test terminals to a different model. 2. If a scanner is connected to one of the sockets. Changing Data Cables 1.0 hub at the bottom of the Multi Lite case. or need to change data cables or audio cables for any other reason. Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use. Use the hex key in the Multi Lite lid organizer pouch to unscrew and remove the middle panel in the case. The scanner must at no time be connected to the +12V cigarette lighter socket.   Note that the scanner data cable is connected to the laptop. see below. connect the scanner USB cable to the laptop. . See the Nemo Scanner Guide for more information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

1) 2) . lift it from the right-hand side of the case when you are facing it. After removing the screws in the middle panel. and attach it to the case lid as shown in the picture sequence below.382 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3.

you will see the USB 2. 5. After removing the middle panel.APPE NDI X 6 383 3) 4) 4. Turn the thumb screws as illustrated in the picture below to open and remove the hub clamp cover.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) in the upper right-hand corner. .

7.0 hub back into its original place. Insert the data cables through the round PGSD-4 openings in the middle panel. 9. Once the cover is removed. . and push the USB 2. 10. change the data cables for the new test terminals.384 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. If the data cable driver is different from the one used earlier. remember to install the new driver before connecting the data cable to the laptop. Place and screw the hub clamp cover back into place with the thumb screws. Next. They will be connected to the terminals later on after the phones are attached to the mobile holders. Move the hub in the direction shown by the red arrow and lift to remove the cover. 11. 8. If you also need to change audio cables. Consult the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions. you can remove the USB data cables. proceed to the following section.

7lbs) Yes* Yes Yes Yes Nemo Outdoor Multi 6 1 internal 6 Yes 60. attach and screw the middle panel back into place.4 x 51. back-up battery.8") 55.0.3kg (22.3 x 9.1 standard vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC. Changing audio cables 1. PCB.0 class T5. 13. Refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide (p. and the TerraTec sound card * Max. 412) for more details regarding the sound card setup.89" x 6.APPE NDI X 6 385 12.06" x 12. Remove the audio cables from the TerraTec sound card. Start with measurements.8 cm (19. If you have not already done it.0 x 8. number of terminals Max. 3.77" x 7. You can now proceed with measurements. allowance varies depending on air lines .0 hub.4") ~25kg (55lbs) No Yes Yes Yes Electrical parts between Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite and Nemo Outdoor Multi are identical including USB hub. ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III ~10.72“) Weight (Multi Lite without terminals and antennas) Carry-on luggage Back up battery (Li-ion 2500mAh) / charger Industrial USB 2.2 x 40 x 18. charger.41" ) Interior dimensions 45. Nemo Outdoor Multi Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Max.7 x 17.0 x 24.6 cm (24.3 x 45.9 x 18. number of scanners Max. Digi Hubport 7C Comply: 300 019-2-5 V3.9 x 32. 2.1 x 20. Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs.1 cm (18.2 x 20. remove the case middle panel as instructed above. If you are done with changing cables.78" x 15. number of voice quality terminals Pure sine wave inverter (300W) Exterior dimensions 6 1 external 6 No 50.8 cm (21.

EVOQ.1 and P862.0 audio system. For a list of supported terminals. It is supported with the Nemo Outdoor platform.e. the TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card and with the Maya44 USB sound card. and TD-SCDMA technologies. the Nemo audio module. the Nemo Audio Module (EVOQ). 1-6 audio modules.VOICE QUALITY GUIDE Nemo Voice Quality is an option for the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. With all options. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Nemo Audio modules (EVOQs) consists of Nemo Outdoor. The supported technologies are GSM. If you combine the TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards. the TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound card and the Maya44 sound card it is possible to perform two types of voice quality measurements. and it supports the USB 2. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6 Fire USB sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendations P. the TerraTec sound card.862. the Maya44 sound card. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice calls as perceived by end-users. 1-4 mobiles. Also measurements based on the WBAMR codec are supported. four channels. WCDMA. and CDMA2000. 1-4 mobiles. . and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. i. CDMA2000.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. Nemo Outdoor supports voice quality measurements with three options: with the Nemo Audio Module. you can connect up to 6 test terminals with Nemo Outdoor Multi. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. For a list of supported terminals. and the GSM.386 Nemo O ut door User M a nual APPENDIX 7 . Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. mobileto-mobile and fixed-to-mobile measurements. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Maya44 sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor. 1-6 mobiles. runs in real-time on a DSP board. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. WCDMA.

These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal.APPE NDI X 7 387 In mobile-to-mobile measurements. Voice Quality mobile-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Modules Voice Quality with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card . one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample.

Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Module Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with TerraTec DMX 6 Fire Sound Card . a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end.388 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end.

when busy tone detection has not been performed. the server sends the identified. after which it compares the recorded sample and chooses the best matching sample from the default samples unless sample forcing is not used on server side. e. or until Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Server ends the call. short synchronization tone is sent. The test goes on alternating until a call drops. it takes up to 30 seconds for the server to hang up the line automatically. They are used for synchronization purposes and do not affect the PESQ score. The server records 1. opens a measurement file.5 seconds of incoming audio. with mobile-to-fixed-line testing synchronization tone is sent first from the mobile/ EVOQ/sound card audio module to the server.g. or after a user-defined time that can be adjusted via the Nemo Server Manager application. Along with the test samples. After the identification. Nemo Outdoor sends the same sample to the server. calculates the score (MOS UL). This time the server recognizes the sample. records it for the duration of the identified sample. . If the server does not detect the line drop. and stores the result there. For example. The synchronization tone is always sent from the side which sends the audio sample. the server answers the call and Nemo Outdoor/EVOQ/sound card audio module starts sending the configured test sample. non-degraded sample to Nemo Outdoor that records it and calculates the PESQ score (MOS DL).APPE NDI X 7 389 VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line When Nemo Outdoor calls a fixed line that is connected to Nemo Server. The measurement file on server side is closed when the line is dropped. After receiving the test sample.

0. In the following four parts.8 and Nemo Server 2. and the setup exemplified with a picture.0. Refer to the Nemo Outdoor user manual for detailed instructions. PSTN lines of Nemo Server must be calibrated before use. the terminal-specific cables will be listed. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software first. Busy call detection wizard of Nemo Server must be done before use. NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ)  Setting Up the System This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. . The change and description above applies to firmware version 2.    Note that the synchronization algorithm has been changed for the EVOQ audio module.390 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Mobile-to-Mobile The same logic is used also in mobile-to-mobile testing as with mobile-to-fixed line. Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing The image below exemplifies the voice quality module and cable setup. and later.

also 10014900 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. Product Code 100244-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia terminals compatible with CA-86US v. -If the number of terminals exceeds two. 6680. N75 and N80. 6630. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) Nokia DKU-2/CA-86US v.2 data cables including: -6230i.2 audio/ data cable (420008-00) -Ground Type: Differential Ground (425000-01) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture.APPE NDI X 7 391 Note that all audio cables need to be inserted with the red dot facing upwards. .

Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. RCA Female. also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. . Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ.392 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Product Code 100245-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95 series terminals including: Nokia 95 and Nokia 95US. If the number of terminals exceeds two.

APPE NDI X 7 393 Product Code 100246-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia 3500 and 612x series terminals. 6120 and Nokia 6121. Included are Nokia 3500.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) 2. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ. .5mm 4-P-RCA male audio cable (420042-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. RCA Female. If the number of terminals exceeds two. also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

5mm.3. Configuration -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) 425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2. 100250-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8300 terminal.3. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm.5mm angle 100248-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8000 terminal.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2. . If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.394 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Product Code 100247-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG LHD-200E terminal.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.3.5mm. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. 100249-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8100 terminal. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.5mm. RCA Female.

.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 1) 1) Audio adapter plug 2. RCA Female.KX 206 terminal.3.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) 3) EVOQ.APPE NDI X 7 395 (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.5mm. -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.3. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.5mm.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more. RCA Female. and that the YELLOW RCA female connector must be connected to the WHITE RCA male connector.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00)  Note that the WHITE RCA female connector must be connected to RED RCA male connector. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 100255-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG.

Switch on power in Multi holder from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. which may need to be reinstalled. The amber light may also flash briefly during installation. the light will blink red a few times before turning green when it is reconnected. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically. There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will blink red. If the loss is due to unplugging the unit. Green: This light indicates that the serial ports are successfully set up and the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8) is operating normally. The following section will provide information on how to connect the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device.  Red: This light signifies the loss of USB communication with the host. amber.396 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. . the light indicates a problem with the (Edgeport/8) drivers. 2.  Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device When there are two or more audio modules in use.    Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device: 1. 3. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC2 Multi device. Otherwise. or green. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer. Please observe the led during installation and use as it will indicate whether the Multi unit is working properly or not. The red will also blink during installation until the installation is complete. Switch on the computer. insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk with the Edgeport/8 driver file into the CD-ROM drive. the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. Connect the USB cable to the Multi holder and the other end to your computer. Amber (orange): This light signifies serial port activity on the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8).

Port2 is the second new COM port (e. 5. There should be eight new COM ports. etc. . Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel.. Wait until the process is finished. Double-click on Ports. Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab click the Device Manager button). Click Yes in the Digital Signature Not Found dialog if it appears. Windows® 2000 may find many new devices. Drivers are found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. Windows will detect the new Edgeport/8 device.APPE NDI X 6 397 4.  Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e.g. start from the beginning. COM49). If not. COM50)..g.

g. COM50). there are eight new COM ports. Insert plug A in a serial port on the MMAC unit and plug B on the connector marked COM on the audio module.g. Connect the trace cable between the audio module and the MMAC unit. Port2 is the second new COM port (e. COM49).  Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e. As described in the Multi device set-up. 1.MMAC2 Please complete the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi installation first as the Voice Quality devices are connected to the COM port provided by the Multi mobile holder. . etc...398 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   Connecting Voice Quality Devices .

Insert plug A to the test terminal. Use the three-headed DKU-2 trace/audio cable to connect the test terminal and the audio module.APPE NDI X 6 399 2. . plug B to a free USB port on your computer/MMAC unit. and plug C to the connector marked Phone on the audio module.

4. The Phone Properties dialog is opened. A green led should light up. In the Configuration Manager. Start Nemo Outdoor. Connect the power cable between the audio modules and the MMAC unit. click Add and select the device. Insert the A plugs to the connectors marked Power on the audio modules and B plug in the front panel of the MMAC unit. .400 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3.

Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number. Modems tab). Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port. select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. For example. e. 6. the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). In the VQ Device Port. COM52 in the example below. Go to the Device Manager.. .APPE NDI X 6 401 5. COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.g.

Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Click OK.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals).  Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles and audio modules.402 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or to second highest level with N95 and other ‘2. The test terminal will start and initialize the audio module. You are now ready to start the measurements. 8.5/3. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields. make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination.  . Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Switch off alert and warning tones.

N96. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. N85US. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. N96US. . The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi option without the carrying case. after initial connection to a USB port. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC3 Multi device.APPE NDI X 6 403  Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device When there are two or more audio modules in use. and 6720US terminals. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. N97. N97US. the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. 6720.   Note that with Nokia N85.

insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk into the CD-ROM drive.   Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device: 1. Switch on power in Multi from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. 3. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. Connect the USB cable to the Multi and the other end to your computer. yellow or no light depending on the power usage of Nemo Outdoor Multi. When the light is off. 2. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically. There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will show green. it means that the device is off. . Red light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the internal back-up battery power source.404 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi system with the carrying case option. as described below. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty. red.    Green light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. Switch on the computer.

Double-click on the Universal Serial Bus Controllers item. click on the Device Manager button). You should be able to see the Generic USB Hub item.APPE NDI X 6 405 4. refer to the Nemo Outdoor manual. . Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel). However. For instructions on how to set up the MMAC3 system. below you will find instructions on how to connect the voice quality devices with MMAC3 Multi unit. Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab.

406 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Connecting EVOQ audio modules with MMAC3 The voice quality system is shown below. . The graph shows the system on the whole.

APPE NDI X 6

407

The following picture shows the setup with an MMAC3 Multi unit, the voice quality plate, three voice quality (EVOQ) modules, an Edgeport, and one voice quality test mobile. Please refer to the Nemo Server manual for information on how to connect the Voice Quality system with the server.

1. The voice quality plate is attached to the MMAC3 unit with screws (see the red arrows). The black arrows above indicate the screws that go in the slots underneath the voice quality (EVOQ) box to keep it in place. 2. Insert plug A of the serial cable in a serial port in the Edgeport box, and plug B in the COM port in the voice quality (EVOQ) box. One end of the A to B data cable (C) goes to Edgeport, and the other end to the laptop computer.

408

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

24. The voice quality boxes are all connected to the back of the MMAC3 unit (D). The MMAC3 unit is connected to a power source through a power cable (E). Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual for information on how to connect the MMAC3 unit to a power source.

25. Start Nemo Outdoor. In the Configuration Manager, click Add and select the device. The Phone Properties dialog is opened.

APPE NDI X 6

409

26. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options, Modems tab). Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port, e.g., COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.

27. In the VQ Device Port, select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. For example, the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). Go to the Device Manager. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number, COM52 in the example below.

410

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

28. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields.

Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. If you have several mobiles and audio modules, make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or level 4 with N95 and other ‘2.5/3.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals). Switch off alert and warning tones. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. 29. Click OK. The test terminal will start and initialize the terminal used with the EVOQ module, the module needs to be modified accordingly. The terminals are either used by common ground cables or differential ground cables. The table below shows the terminal model and ground type. Terminal Nokia terminals 6230i, 6630, 6650, 6651, 6680, N75, N80 Nokia N95, Nokia 7376, 6120, 6121, 3500, 6720 LG VX8X00 series Differential Ground Yes Common Ground Jumper J9 in place No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

If the purchased voice quality system includes both differential and common ground terminals, the EVOQ modules are by default set for differential ground.

APPE NDI X 6

411

Disassembling the EVOQ Module
1. Remove the cover from EVOQ module by unscrewing the four M4*6 screws.

2. Remove the pc board from the box by unscrewing the screws shown in picture 2.0. Make sure you are ESD protected to avoid damaging the pc board.

3. Install jumper J9 in place as shown in the picture below.

412

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Assembling the EVOQ Module
Place the pc board back into the box and tighten the screws. Place the cover on top of the box and tighten the screws.

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD
Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data
                    USB 2.0 audio system 1 microphone input with gain control (combo XLR / 6.3 mm jack) 48V phantom power -20 dB pad switch 1 instrument input with gain control (6.3 mm jack) 4 analogue inputs (cinch) 1 phono input (RCA cinch) with RIAA equaliser and gain control 6 analogue outputs (cinch) Stereo to 5.1 Surround Expander 1 headphone jack (6.3 mm) with separate volume controller 1 optical digital input/output (TOS Link) 1 coaxial digital input/output (cinch) 1 MIDI interface In/Out (5-pin DIN) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (input 1/2) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 105 dB (A) SNR* (input 3/4) 24 bit / 192 kHz D/A converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (outputs 1-6) WDM driver for Windows XP SP2 / Vista ASIO 2.0 support Control panel for Windows XP SP2 / Vista System Requirements o o o o o 2.0 GHz Intel or AMD CPU Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP X64 or Windows Vista or Windows Vista X64 512 MB RAM 1 free USB 2.0 port CD/DVD drive

APPE NDI X 6

413

Scope of delivery o o o o o DMX 6Fire USB Power supply USB cable 1.8m 1 Adaptor (6.3mm  3.5mm mono) 1 Adaptor (6.3mm  3.5mm stereo)

Setting up the system
This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software and the DMX 6Fire USB driver first.  Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the hardware requirements stated above; the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.0 GHz or AMD PCU, or more powerful.

Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP
 Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. However, power can be switched on in the sound card. 1. Before you start, ensure that your Windows XP version is up to date. Right-click the My Computer icon and choose Properties from the context menu. The System Properties dialog appears, in which you can check your current service pack version. You can also enter the System Properties dialog by going to Start | Settings | Control Panel | System. It is important for Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2 for short) or Windows Vista to be installed on your computer. If this is not the case, please contact Microsoft (www.microsoft.com) to update your system. For Windows, this is generally free of charge. 2. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card driver. Please note that this specific version of the driver needs to be used. 3. Double-click on the installation file. The installation wizard will now display its welcome message.

414

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

4. The default destination for the installation is specified in the following window. If you prefer another folder, select Browse... and choose the corresponding directory. Then, click Install.

5. You can disregard the safety warning without concern. Click Continue Anyway to continue. 6. The driver is now installed in the system, and as soon as the message below appears, you can connect the DMX 6Fire USB to your computer's USB 2.0 port using the cable provided. If Nemo Multi hardware is used, sound card can be connected also to the Multi unit. Windows XP will automatically recognize the device as new hardware and open the driver installation dialogue.

APPE NDI X 6

415

7. The Windows Found New Hardware Wizard asks what driver to use for the new hardware component. You do not have to search for the driver online. The next window asks about the driver for the DMX 6Fire USB hardware. Next, select Install the software automatically [Recommended] and confirm with Next. 8. Then, just to be safe, a new system restore point is set. Nothing to be concerned about—this is a standard precaution.

9. This concludes part 1 of the installation, so click Finish. 10. This returns you to the installation wizard, as only the drivers for the USB controller have been installed; now, the drivers that make the controller a USB audio device are installed. Here, too, select Install the software automatically to install the second batch of drivers. 11. Again, you can safely ignore the message that the software did not pass the Windows Logo test. 12. Click Finish to complete the installation of the drivers.

N97. Note that the volume level of the test terminals needs to be adjusted according to the table below during a voice call: Terminal Nokia 3500. After installation remember to check that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls are adjusted to the minimum and the PAD switches are in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button. 14. N95 US. N96 US. C5-03. N95. 6121. Once the drivers have been installed. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7 16. Start TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Control Panel from Start | TerraTec | DMX6FireUSB. the DMX 6Fire USB should appear in the device manager with the following entries. C676 LG VX8350. N96. C5. 15. . 6120. C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206. N97US Nokia 6720(US). N85 US. N85.416 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 13.

Input settings:     Set Input ½ and Input ¾ levels to +5dB Set the Waveplay ½ and Waveplay ¾ levels to -5dB (with Datang and Leadcore: -13dB.APPE NDI X 6 417 17. 19. From the control panel set the settings as in the screen shots below. and with Samsung SGH-U800: -5db -> -10db) Unset all routing buttons at the bottom of the panel except set Waveplay 1/2 routing to 1/2 and Waveplay 3/4 routing to ¾ Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals. Output settings:  Set all Output levels and Master to 0dB . unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E terminals the TerraTec control panel settings are different from other terminals. 18. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/WCDMA terminals. Remember to also pay attention to the bottom part of the panel.

e. You will see a list of numbered options from channel 1 onwards.418 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 20. . select Maximum (8. In this case please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further information. 22. You can leave the DMX control panel open or close it. Next. in Nemo Outdoor add a terminal by going to Measurement | Add New Device | Phone In the Phone Properties dialog select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port.. Select the port with the bigger number as the modem port and the port with the smaller number as the trace port. Next. Now you can start Nemo Outdoor. select the Sound card channel item.g. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options. 21. COM100 as trace port and COM101 as modem port. From Miscellaneous | Asio | Asio Latency. Modems tab).  Note that if there is a system that measures acceleration in the laptop and which causes the hard disk to stop when jolted. Select the channel based on to which LINE IN and LINE out jack you connected the audio cable in the sound card. With the Lenovo T61 laptop you can turn this system off by going to Start | ThinkVantage Productivity Center and selecting Security | Protection and Recovery | Protect my hard-drive [ ] Enable Active Protection System. You do not need to select anything in the dial-up connection fields unless you are also performing data transfers.0ms 384 samples) and close the Asio Latency window. Otherwise there may be breaks in the measurement files. it should be turned off.

  Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual in Appendix 5 for information on the Nemo Outdoor Multi system. If you have several mobiles. Nemo Outdoor Multi is needed. Refer to page 103 for more information on voice quality settings. Note that if you are using more than two mobiles for voice quality measurements. 24. Click OK in the Measurement Properties dialog. if the computer is connected to the inverter during a measurement. make sure that you select the correct channel for each mobile. it is recommended that the computer and sound card be connected to the inverter prior to starting measurements. Note that when you are using a separate 300W inverter. it is possible that it causes a temporary supply voltage disconnection.APPE NDI X 6 419 23. For example. You are now ready to perform voice quality measurements. Select Measurement Properties | Voice number | Properties.  . This further risks an interruption in the reception of MOS values.

disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. try closing the unnecessary ones. First.0 sound card  NOTE! Use this code only when voice quality system is sold with Nemo Outdoor Multi (100149-00 or 10024300) or without multi hardware.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. an Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.420 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card Product Code 100256-01 Product Name Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. try the following. if you have many applications running on the laptop. Next. First of all.5mm ELFA 80-361-47 (499048-04) -Terratec Cover 1180-p-030 (42700101) -Terratec Strain Relief 1180-p031(427001-02) -Line Mic4 adapter (427000-01)  .0 sound card with required accessories including: -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. ELFA 69-715-27 (499048-02) -Inverter Mascot 9984 12V/ 220V 150W for sound card.0 sound card -USB A to B data cable -220V power supply -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB driver (427001-00) -Inverter Mascot 2285 12V/ 220V 300W for sound card and computer. TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results. ELFA 69-717-09 (499048-05) -PWR Cable for Inverter (4m) (499048-03) -Extension cord for sound card ELFA 42-223-76 (419009-00) -Flat head screw driver 3. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously.0 Sound Card    Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one USB sound card can be connected to the computer at a time Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements. With Nemo Multi Lite use code 100318-00 Configuration 1) 1 x Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer.

The A to B USB cable is connected to the USB connector.  The red RCA lead is connected to LINE IN 1 and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT 1. In case of overload the user risks receiving erroneous measurement results.APPE NDI X 6 421  Note that when used in a vehicle. When there are more than one test terminal in use. the sound card should only be used with the two power inverters provided by Anite Finland. The Mascot 9984 inverter is only meant to be used with the sound card. Nokia N85(US)/N95(US)/N96(US)/6720(US). N96 and N96US Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) . the terminals always take up the same number in both LINE IN and LINE OUT. N95US. and the other end of the cable is connected directly to the laptop. It is not recommended that other devices be connected to it to ensure sufficient power supply. N97(US) Product Code 100257-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95.  At the back of the TerraTec Sound Card:    The power cable is connected to the POWER connector and the other end of the power cable is connected to the inverter. Note that the A to B USB cable should be connected directly to the laptop! Do not connect the cable to the multi hardware (if used). and the PAD switches need to be in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. The Mascot 2285 inverter is meant to be used with the sound card and the laptop. Note that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls need to be adjusted to the minimum.

100257-03 Voice Quality with Nokia N85. Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male. Note that the red audio cable (CA-75U) connector will remain unused. N97US. N97. 6720 and 6720US.female) (42004600) 2) 1 x audio cable CA-75U (420047-00) The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter (1) and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead. N85US.422 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2) Audio cable CA-75U included in the terminal sales package. The red RCA lead will be connected to LINE IN X and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT X connector. .

Nokia 3500 and 612X Product Code 100258-01 Product Name N612x/3500 audio cables/ adapter package.RCA male audio cable (420042-00) 3) RCA male audio cable (420042-00) The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable Line In connector in the sound card. 6121 and Nokia 3500. Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) 2) 1 x 2.5mm 4.  Note that the volume on the Nokia N85/N95/N96/6720/N97 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call.APPE NDI X 6 423 You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. The red audio cable connector will remain unused. as shown below. . The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector. and the yellow audio connector to the line mic adapter.pin.Nokia 6120.

In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card.  Note that the volume on the Nokia 612X and 3500 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call.424 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. and the yellow audio connector to the Line mic adapter. . as shown below.

and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter (colors visible on the inside of the connectors). LG KX206. Note that the volume on LG C676 and KX206 needs to be adjusted to level 4 (4/7) during a voice call. LG C676. Configuration     Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.APPE NDI X 6 425 LG CDMA/VX8350/VX8360/Huawei C7600 (EVDO) Product Code 100259-01 Product Name CDMA audio cable/adapter package for LG C680. The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card. .5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) Note that the volume on LG C680 needs to be adjusted to level 3 (3/8) during a voice call. LG KX256. LG VX8350/VX8360 and Huawei C7600. Note that the volume on the Huawei C7600 terminal needs to be adjusted to maximum level (7/7) during a voice call.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. Note that the volume on the LG VX8350 and VX8360 terminals needs to be adjusted to the maximum (8/8) during a voice call.5mm3.

5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN/ANALOG IN connector in the sound card.5mm3. Configuration Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2. and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter which is connected to the sound card LINE OUT/ANALOG OUT connector(s) (colors visible on the inside of the connectors). .426 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore LC 8130E Product Code 100260-01 Product Name Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore 8130E audio cable/adapter package. Below you see examples for both the TerraTec and Maya sound cards.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.

APPE NDI X 6 427 You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the sound card. .

. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/ WCDMA terminals. unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals.428 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals the Terratec control panel settings are different from other terminals.

5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00) 3) Samsung S20-Pin Multi-Adapter 2.5mm AAET554CBEBSTD (419004-01) Note that the volume on the Samsung SGH-U800 terminal needs to be adjusted to 3 / 7 during a voice call. The white (see inside the connector) audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the red audio connector to the red RCA lead.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.APPE NDI X 6 429 Samsung SGH-U800 Product Code 100259-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Samsung audio cable/adapter package for the following Samsung models: SGH-U800 Configuration  Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm3. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector. .

N85.  Note that with Nokia C5. In this case the red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card. C5-03. and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter. as shown below. TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card and with Nemo Outdoor Multi. 6720 and 6720US terminals. N96US. the terminal will always have the same COM ports.430 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. C7-00. N85US. . N97US. after initial connection to a USB port. N96. N97.

place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. sound cards from other manufacturers can be connected simultaneously to the same laptop with Maya44.   NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications                4 input channels and 4 output channels with RCA connectors -10dBV input / output level (unbalanced) optical S/PDIF digital output with Miniplug connector headphone output (1/8" connector) with 60mW amplifier ASIO 2.0 and CoreAudio support (4 inputs / 4 outputs) MME / WDM support (2 inputs / 2 outputs) standard USB connection to PC compatible with Windows 2000. an Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher is required Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the following hardware requirements: the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. However. disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. Next. First of all. . XP and Vista compatible with all major DJ software applications compatible with all major professional audio applications compact. Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. or more powerful. First. portable and lightweight design Note that for voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. try the following. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used.APPE NDI X 6 431  Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements.0 GHz or AMD PCU. if you have many applications running on the laptop. it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one Maya44 USB sound card can be connected to a computer at a time. try closing the unnecessary ones.

432 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Maya44 sound card components .

do as instructed. 4. and click on Install. and click OK. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\Maya44 USB driver. 8. power can be switched on in the sound card. 5. In such a case.exe to start the installation. Windows should automatically detect the Maya44 sound card. Click on Install the driver. 7. A dialog appears suggesting you connect the Maya sound card to a USB slot in your PC. 1. Double-click on Setup. 6.APPE NDI X 6 433 Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver  Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. 3. Select I accept the agreement in the License Agreement dialog. . Choose the language of your preference. The installation wizard may prompt you to remove and reconnect the sound card. 9. However. 2. Click Exit in the Installation finished dialog.

The AudioDevice on USB Bus 2.8. and Universal Serial Bus controllers. .7 items should appear under Sound. 11.7 and Maya 44 2. The driver installation is now finished.8. go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button. respectively. Once the drivers have been installed. video and game controllers.434 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 10.

Next. . 16. Next. The numbering in Analog Out and Analog in should be the same for each terminal.APPE NDI X 6 435 12. connect your test terminals to Maya sound card. 14. The line mic adapter goes to Analog Out. Configure the settings as in the image below. and the White cable to Analog in. If the device is connected. 15. If the device is not connected. terminal 1 will take up Analog Out 1 and Analog In 1 connectors. For example. the following dialog appears. go to the installation folder and click on Maya44Panel.exe. the following control panel dialog appears. And below the Input and Output settings clarified. 13. From the picture below you will see the right configuration.

after initial connection to a USB port. Set the Monitor In 1+2 and 3+4 to mute. and with Nemo Outdoor Multi or Nemo Multi Lite. 6720. N85. set the Input settings slide control to between 7 and 8. and 6720US terminals. MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the Maya44 and TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound cards. N97. N97US. and the Output slide control all the way up as in the image. C7-00. Up to 6 test terminals can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi with this configuration. C5-03. N96. N85US. N96US.436 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 17. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. 18. Hence. .  Note that with Nokia C5.

place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used. Note that a Quad-core computer must be used with voice quality measurements if the number of VQ terminals is more than four. The Maya44 sound card can be placed on the middle panel as shown in the image above.APPE NDI X 6 437  Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. The TerraTec sound card is located at the bottom of the Multi Lite casing. During transportation it can be placed in the pouch at the bottom of the case lid. When using Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. four VQ terminals are connected to TerraTec and two VQ terminals to the Maya44 sound card.   .

You will receive some default test samples along with Nemo Outdoor but if you wish to use your own samples. as it may impair sample flow from the terminal.5 seconds have to be different in each sample Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements  Making mobile-to-mobile voice quality measurements: 1. please read the requirements below. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 32). Switch off the alert and warning tones. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4 or to the second highest level with N95. Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below:  .438 Nemo O ut door User M a nual MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS After software installations and hardware setup you are ready to start the measurements. Test sample requirements:       8kHz sampling rate 16-bit linear PCM signal scaled to 90% of full scale band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 250Hz and 3500Hz minimum duration of each sample: 2 seconds maximum duration of each sample: o o EVOQ module: 6 seconds TerraTec sound card: 10 seconds Server-side limitations that do not affect mobile-to-mobile testing are:   maximum of nine samples total in server test-sample folder the first 1.   Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements.

3. C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206. N85 US. click Add and select Voice Call from the menu. Click on the Script Editor button to create a new script. N97. i. N96.. In the Script Editor. N85. N95 US. C5-03. 4. Open the Measurement Properties. the mobile that you are calling from. 6121. N96 US.e. C5. C676 LG VX8350. Define the voice quality settings for the first mobile. Script dialog for the first mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7 2. N97US Nokia 6720(US).APPE NDI X 6 439 Terminal Nokia 3500. 6120. N95. .

Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. the mobile that you are calling. Select the Voice quality option. i.e. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:     Define the phone number of the second mobile.440 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5.. . Click OK. Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.

7. Define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter. Open the Measurement Properties dialog for the second mobile (Measurement | <device> | Measurement Properties). the mobile that you are calling to.APPE NDI X 6 441 6. Define the voice quality settings for the second mobile. Finally click Close. 8. In the Script Editor dialog. . Click Save and type a file name for the script.e. double-click on the End a voice call item to define whether end command type is normal or forced.. i. 9.

. click the Properties button next to the Voice Number field. Configuration dialog. In the Measurement Properties.442 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 10.

Select Data | Line Graph | New. Click OK. . Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:      Define the phone number of the first mobile.APPE NDI X 6 443 11. i. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. 12. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Define a Prefix for the received files. Select the audio parameters. 13. The prefix will be added at the beginning of the file name of all received files. An empty line graph window opens. the mobile that you are receiving calls from.e. Select the Voice quality option Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. and drag them in the graph window. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Select the same file as for the other mobile.

444 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 14. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 32). as it may impair sample flow from the terminal.  Making mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements: 1. .   Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. See Appendix 1 for detailed instructions. Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements  Please complete the Nemo server installation before continuing. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4. Switch off the alert and warning tones.

5. C7-00 LG C680 LG KX206. select Start Voice Call from the Measurement menu or by clicking the Device Commands button. If you are using scripts. C5-03. N95 US. N85. 4. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2. N95. C5. Define the voice quality settings in the Voice Call Properties dialog:   Select one of the default test samples.APPE NDI X 6 445  Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below: Terminal Nokia 3500. Make sure that the server has the same samples in its reference sample folder (see Nemo Server installation guide for details). If you are performing measurements manually. the voice quality measurement is run. 3. N85 US. With each voice call. . 6120. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. N96. Define the voice quality settings for the mobile. N97. Set the time between calls parameter to one minute. C676 LG VX8350. click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. N97US Nokia 6720(US). N96 US. 6121.

7. click Add and select Voice Call from the menu. In the Voice Call Properties dialog: . Script dialog for the mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). In the Script Editor. 6. Click the Script Editor button to create a new script.446 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual   Open the Measurement Properties.

. Please make sure that the same reference file exists also on the server. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. Select the Voice Quality option. the server that is answering the calls and sending back the samples.APPE NDI X 6 447    Define the phone number of the fixed end. . i. In the Script Editor dialog.e. 8. Click OK. define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter.

An empty line graph window opens.448 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 9. and drag them in the graph window. . Select Data | Line Graph | New. Select the audio parameters. 10. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. 11. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view. Click Save and type a file name for the script. Finally click Close.

Click the Start Recording button. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. . Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements.APPE NDI X 6 449 12.

Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity. 2. . read this document for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. it is highly recommended that Nemo Outdoor is started with administration rights by right-clicking the Nemo Outdoor icon and by selecting “Run as administrator”. server or transmission problems. Antivirus Filtering Disable the antivirus application and Windows firewall. it might cause issues with data testing. If the data transfer still does not work properly. It is recommended that the UAC settings are changed to “Never notify”.450 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 9 . In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications. This can be done via User Account Control Settings. If UAC settings cannot be changed. A PS connection can be established but data transfers cannot be made. the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. For example. 3.TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings If UAC (User Account Control) is set to always notify. low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. Go to Network Settings and choose the appropriate connection assigned for the device. Go to Connection Properties and check that antivirus NDIS filtering is unchecked. Activate PS connection (activate PDP context). Low Data Throughputs In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications. please do the following: 1.

Check the . . Start a data transfer and observe the application data throughput value. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation. Command prompt FTP throughput. When configuring a device with Nemo Outdoor. Make a comparison test between Nemo Outdoor and the connection manager used with the device. As ports are left blank it is not possible to perform a manual PDP context activation or data transfer via Nemo Outdoor. Try another FTP server for comparison. Make the same test again but this time make a connection using Nemo Outdoor.    All Windows Versions  How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: 1. However.APPE NDI X 9 451 In LTE networks. in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. Does not work manually. Also try different servers. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used. not Attach/detach or PDP context activation or deactivation commands. Script files should include only data transfer commands.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. script is always needed. typically 10-20%. a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). Works also manually.pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. For Nemo Outdoor 5. For Nemo Outdoor 5. observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). Other things that could help troubleshooting:    Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. a script file with data connection commands can be used. only the trace port should be defined. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0. PRB affects throughput directly. Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. The modem port and dial-up connection must be left blank. For better results. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell.

This registry entry can be removed.  Using debug logs (for developers. the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.  TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry. if the same registry value that XP uses is set. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB. Windows XP Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed. Window shows the current value. In most cases.nmf) does not save window size info.  2. Window size not set. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0: 3. A measurement file (.): 1. However. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.   . They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. TCP Auto-Tuning detected. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. etc. Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. Windows Vista/Windows7 Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. Look at the Tcp tree. If the registry value is missing. help desk. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software.452 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Using Nemo Outdoor: 1. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Set to default.

APPE NDI X 9 453 If the TCP auto-tuning is disabled Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB.40 and newer checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled.  Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. 2. type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations: . 4. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.  6. Outdoor 5. However. 7. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”  3.  5.  How to check TCP auto-tuning state: 1. Right-click and select Run as administrator. Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled.  Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state.

com/kb/943198) is needed when using HSDPA category 6 or higher data transfer speeds with Nokia test terminals. Windows XP fix KB943198 (http://support. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. restricted: Recommended. normal: Default value. It enables receive window values of over 16 MB.454 Nemo O ut door User M a nual      disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. 8.microsoft. very conservatively. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended. . Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. only intended for research purposes). Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value. it can degrade performance in common scenarios. highlyrestricted: Recommended. Limits to 64 KB (65535).

This EULA grants you the following rights: Software. and any "online" or electronic documentation. you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. Decompilation and Disassembly.READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland Ltd for the Anite Finland Ltd software product(s). The Software Product includes computer software. . However. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. emulation. You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product. Separation of Components. You may not modify. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. 1. identified above ("Software Product" or "Software"). You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware"). the associated media. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary code form only over an internal network. Removal. Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. By installing. Limitations on Reverse Engineering. or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. In such event. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as designated above. copying or otherwise using the Software Product. and distribute the Software Product to your other computers over an internal network. you may not use or copy the Software Product.APPE NDI X 10 455 APPENDIX 10 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT . and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase. If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA. Adaptations and Other Changes. 2. GRANT OF LICENSE. you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. in whatever form. Storage/Network/Single Use. SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. Nothing in this license statement permits you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats. not sold. Limitations on Modifications. The Software Product is licensed. adapt or otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite Finland Ltd's prior written consent. any printed materials.

updates and component parts and verify to Anite Finland Ltd in writing that such has been done. Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA. US. Keyhl GmbH. Software Transfer. You may not rent.456 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Not for Resale. Without prejudice to any other rights. gpl-license. This Software Product is “Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as specified below. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its business purpose. you must destroy all copies of the Software Product and all associated media. Portions based on WinWAP technology. Erlangen. video. in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices. and other patents and is provided under license from OPTICOM Dipl.txt located in the Nemo Outdoor installation directory. Iperf copyright Copyright (c) 1999-2006. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Finland Ltd as part of the Support Services. see libresample-license. -Ing.com Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is protected by copyright and by European. Rental. animations.org. http://www. This software uses Libresample library distributed under LGPL license. lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity. photographs. in the Anite Finland Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes. 2004. code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product.pesq.txt and lgpl-license. Copyright Slob-Trot Software Oy Ab 2004. http://www. and any copies of the Software Product. Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. music.opticom. including for product updates and development. modify or alter any Anite Finland Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product. are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. In either event. You may not remove.txt. audio. Germany. The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved. 3. printed materials.de.winwap. Duration and Termination. You may terminate this EULA at any time. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package or download and continues until termination. All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including but not limited to any images. the accompanying printed materials. 4. including but not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services related to the Software Product ("Support Services"). M. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd which such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. please refer to http://www. For detailed license information. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software Product. . For further information. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. incorporated into the Software Product). SUPPORT SERVICES. text and "applets".

You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium. publish. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to another user. and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so.ncsa.uiuc. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY. 5. this list of conditions and the following disclaimers. distribute. subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. and/or sell copies of the Software. modify. free of charge. You may not use or install the other medium on any system. Neither the names of the University of Illinois. to deal in the Software without restriction. Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Finland Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like data and information. . including without limitation the rights to use. WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT. TORT OR OTHERWISE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the Software Product. OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.APPE NDI X 10 457 Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www. except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.edu Permission is hereby granted. NCSA. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person under the same or similar circumstances. merge. sublicense. you may use only that one medium that is appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not loan. to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"). Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM. rent. ARISING FROM. 6. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS". this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. copy.

9. and any accompanying hardware.Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19. fitness for a particular purpose. 8. or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty. 10. with regard to the Software Product. loss of business information. they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. whichever is longer. at Anite Finland Ltd option. third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively. so the above limitation may not apply to you. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software . as applicable. consequential. misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and. U. Anite Finland Ltd disclaims all other warranties. acts of nature or acts of war. tort law or otherwise. LIMITED WARRANTY. the accompanying written materials. the above limitation may not apply to you. In any case. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every kind. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months from the date of receipt. CUSTOMER REMEDIES.458 Nemo O ut door User M a nual 7. incidental. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be.S. Use. business interruption. . The Software Product and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights. either express or implied. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying the Software Product. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. even if these limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence. punitive or indirect damages for personal injury. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. abuse. You may have others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. special. even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. as applicable. in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation. either (a) return of the price paid. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days. and non-infringement of third-party rights. Anite Finland Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software Product. loss of business profits. whether based on contract law. The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident. duplication. 11. including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability. or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. fault or other conduct. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. but not limited to Acts of God.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful